U.S. patent application number 10/419266 was filed with the patent office on 2004-04-29 for method for the preparation of tetrahydrobenzothiepines.
This patent application is currently assigned to G.D. SEARLE, LLC. Invention is credited to Babiak, Kevin A., Carpenter, Andrew, Chou, Shine, Colson, Pierre-Jean, Farid, Payman, Hett, Robert, Huber, Christian H., Koeller, Kevin J., Lawson, Jon P., Li, James, Mar, Eduardo K., Miller, Lawrence M., Orlovski, Vladislav, Peterson, James C., Pozzo, Mark J., Przybyla, Claire A., Tremont, Samuel J., Trivedi, Jay S., Wagner, Grace M., Weisenburger, Gerald A., Zhi, Benxin.
Application Number | 20040082647 10/419266 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 22692813 |
Filed Date | 2004-04-29 |
United States Patent
Application |
20040082647 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Babiak, Kevin A. ; et
al. |
April 29, 2004 |
Method for the preparation of tetrahydrobenzothiepines
Abstract
Among its several embodiments, the present invention provides an
improved process for the preparation of
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide compounds; the provision of a
process for preparing a diastereomeric mixture of
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide compounds from a single
diastereomer of such compounds; the provision of a process for the
preparation of 3-bromo-2-substituted propionaldehyde compounds; and
the provision of a process for the preparation of
3-thio-2-substituted propionaldehyde compounds.
Inventors: |
Babiak, Kevin A.; (Evanston,
IL) ; Carpenter, Andrew; (Zebulon, NC) ; Chou,
Shine; (St. Louis, MO) ; Colson, Pierre-Jean;
(Skokie, IL) ; Farid, Payman; (Vernon Hills,
IL) ; Hett, Robert; (Aarau, CH) ; Huber,
Christian H.; (Skokie, IL) ; Koeller, Kevin J.;
(Maryland Heights, MO) ; Lawson, Jon P.; (Glencoe,
MO) ; Li, James; (Pennington, NJ) ; Mar,
Eduardo K.; (Northbrook, IL) ; Miller, Lawrence
M.; (Des Plaines, IL) ; Orlovski, Vladislav;
(Wheeling, IL) ; Peterson, James C.; (Manchester,
MO) ; Pozzo, Mark J.; (Chesterfield, MO) ;
Przybyla, Claire A.; (Des Plains, IL) ; Tremont,
Samuel J.; (St. Louis, MO) ; Trivedi, Jay S.;
(Skokie, IL) ; Wagner, Grace M.; (Webster Groves,
MO) ; Weisenburger, Gerald A.; (Evanston, IL)
; Zhi, Benxin; (Newbury Park, CA) |
Correspondence
Address: |
BANNER & WITCOFF
1001 G STREET N W
SUITE 1100
WASHINGTON
DC
20001
US
|
Assignee: |
G.D. SEARLE, LLC
Chicago
IL
|
Family ID: |
22692813 |
Appl. No.: |
10/419266 |
Filed: |
April 21, 2003 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
10419266 |
Apr 21, 2003 |
|
|
|
09802279 |
Mar 8, 2001 |
|
|
|
6586434 |
|
|
|
|
60188361 |
Mar 10, 2000 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
514/431 ;
549/12 |
Current CPC
Class: |
C07D 337/08 20130101;
C07D 409/12 20130101; A61K 31/495 20130101; C07D 487/08 20130101;
A61P 3/06 20180101; A61K 31/235 20130101; A61P 43/00 20180101; A61K
31/38 20130101; A61K 31/235 20130101; A61K 2300/00 20130101; A61K
31/38 20130101; A61K 2300/00 20130101; A61K 31/495 20130101; A61K
2300/00 20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
514/431 ;
549/012 |
International
Class: |
C07D 337/16; A61K
031/38 |
Claims
What is claimed is:
1. A method for the preparation of a benzylammonium compound having
the structure of Formula 60 130wherein the method comprises
treating a benzyl alcohol ether compound having the structure of
Formula (61) 131under derivatization conditions to form a
derivatized benzyl ether compound having the structure of Formula
(62) 132and contacting the derivatized benzyl ether compound with
an amine having the structure of Formula (2) 133under amination
conditions thereby producing the benzylammonium compound or a
derivative thereof, wherein: R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and
R.sup.5 independently are selected from the group consisting of H
and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one
or more carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S,
and wherein optionally two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
taken together with the atom to which they are attached form a
cyclic structure; R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of
H, hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, heterocyclyl,
heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl,
OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-,
SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, NCO, CON.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
and C(O)OM; R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from
the substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M; n is a number from 0
to 4; A.sup.- is a pharmaceutically acceptable anion and M is a
pharmaceutically acceptable cation; and X is a nucleophilic
substitution leaving group.
2. A method for the preparation of a benzylammonium compound having
the structure of Formula (1) 134wherein the method comprises
treating a benzyl alcohol ether compound having the structure of
Formula (6) 135under derivatization conditions to form a
derivatized benzyl ether compound having the structure of Formula
(2) 136and contacting the derivatized benzyl ether compound with an
amine having the structure of Formula (42): 137under amination
conditions thereby producing the benzylammonium compound or a
derivative thereof, wherein: R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and
R.sup.5 independently are selected from the group consisting of H
and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one
or more carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S,
and wherein optionally two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
taken together with the atom to which they are attached form a
cyclic structure; and X is a nucleophilic substitution leaving
group.
3. The method of claim 2 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are selected from the group consisting of H and
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
4. The method of claim 3 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are selected from the group consisting of H and
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10hydrocarbyl.
5. The method of claim 4 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
6. The method of claim 5 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
7. The method of claim 6 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are selected from the group consisting of methyl,
ethyl, and propyl.
8. The method of claim 7 wherein R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 each
are methyl.
9. The method of claim 2 wherein the amine comprises a
heterocycle.
10. The method of claim 9 wherein the amine comprises a bicyclic
heterocycle.
11. The method of claim 10 wherein the amine is
1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]oct- ane and the benzylammonium compound has
the structure of Formula (3) 138
12. The method of claim 2 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently
are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
13. The method of claim 2 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently
are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
14. The method of claim 13 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl.
15. The method of claim 14 wherein the benzylammonium compound is
an essentially racemic mixture of enantiomers.
16. The method of claim 14 wherein the benzylammonium compound
produced by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
17. The method of claim 9 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein the benzylammonium compound
produced comprises a (3R) enantiomer that preponderates over a (3S)
enantiomer.
19. The method of claim 17 wherein the benzylammonium compound
produced comprises a (3S) enantiomer that preponderates over a (3R)
enantiomer.
20. The method of claim 9 wherein the amination conditions comprise
a solvent.
21. The method of claim 20 wherein the solvent comprises a
hydrophilic solvent.
22. The method of claim 21 wherein the hydrophilic solvent
comprises a compound selected from the group consisting of water, a
nitrile, an ether, an alcohol, a ketone, and an ester.
23. The method of claim 22 wherein the hydrophilic solvent
comprises a ketone.
24. The method of claim 23 wherein the hydrophilic solvent
comprises a compound selected from the group consisting of acetone
and methyl ethyl ketone.
25. The method of claim 24 wherein the hydrophilic solvent
comprises methyl ethyl ketone.
26. The method of claim 22 wherein the hydrophilic solvent
comprises methyl ethyl ketone and water.
27. The method of claim 21 wherein the solvent further comprises a
hydrophobic solvent.
28. The method of claim 27 wherein the hydrophobic solvent is
selected from the group consisting of an aliphatic hydrocarbon, an
aromatic solvent, and a chlorinated solvent.
29. The method of claim 27 wherein the hydrophobic solvent
comprises an aromatic solvent.
30. The method of claim 29 wherein the hydrophobic solvent is
selected from the group consisting of benzene, toluene,
ethylbenzene, o-xylene, m-xylene, p-xylene, mesitylene, and
naphthalene.
31. The method of claim 30 wherein the hydrophobic solvent is
toluene.
32. The method of claim 27 wherein the solvent comprises methyl
ethyl ketone, toluene, and water.
33. The method of claim 20 wherein the solvent comprises a
hydrophobic solvent.
34. The method of claim 9 wherein the amination conditions comprise
performing the amination at a temperature in the range of about
0.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C.
35. The method of claim 34 wherein the amination conditions
comprise performing the amination at a temperature in the range of
about 15.degree. C. to about 75.degree. C.
36. The method of claim 35 wherein the amination conditions
comprise performing the anination at a temperature in the range of
about 20.degree. C. to about 65.degree. C.
37. The method of claim 2 further comprising an enantiomeric
enrichment step.
38. The method of claim 37 wherein the enantiomeric enrichment step
comprises chiral chromatography.
39. The method of claim 37 wherein the enantiomeric enrichment step
comprises an asymmetric synthesis step.
40. The method of claim 37 wherein the enantiomeric enrichment step
comprises crystallization of a diastereomeric salt.
41. The method of claim 2 wherein X is selected from the group
consisting of chloro, bromo, iodo, methanesulfonato,
toluenesulfonato, benzenesulfonato, and
trifluoromethanesulfonato.
42. The method of claim 41 wherein X is selected from the group
consisting of chloro, bromo, and iodo.
43. The method of claim 42 wherein X is chloro.
44. The method of claim 2 wherein the benzyl alcohol ether compound
has an absolute configuration predominantly of (4R,5R).
45. The method of claim 2 wherein the benzyl alcohol ether compound
has an absolute configuration predominantly of (4S,5S).
46. The method of claim 2 wherein the derivatization conditions
comprise contacting the benzyl alcohol ether compound with a
halogenating agent.
47. The method of claim 46 wherein the halogenating agent is
selected from the group consisting of a thionyl halide, a sulfuryl
halide, a phosphorus trihalide, a phosphorus pentahalide, an oxalyl
halide, and a hydrogen halide.
48. The method of claim 47 wherein the halogenating agent is a
chlorinating agent.
49. The method of claim 47 wherein the halogenating agent is
selected from the group consisting of thionyl chloride, phosphorus
trichloride, phosphorus pentachloride, and hydrogen chloride.
50. The method of claim 49 wherein the halogenating agent is
selected from the group consisting of thionyl chloride, phosphorus
trichloride, and phosphorus pentachloride.
51. The method of claim 49 wherein the halogenating agent is
thionyl chloride.
52. The method of claim 47 wherein the halogenating agent comprises
a mixture of triphenylphosphine and a carbon tetrahalide.
53. The method of claim 47 wherein the halogenating agent comprises
a mixture of triphenylphosphine and carbon tetrachloride.
54. The method of claim 2 further comprising a step in which a
benzyl alcohol ether compound having the structure of Formula (6)
139is prepared wherein the step comprises contacting a phenol
compound having the structure of Formula (4) 140with a substituted
xylene compound having the structure of Formula (5) 141under
substitution conditions to produce the benzyl alcohol ether
compound (6) wherein X.sup.2 is a leaving group.
55. The method of claim 54 wherein the phenol compound has an
absolute configuration of (4R,5R).
56. The method of claim 54 wherein the phenol compound has an
absolute configuration of (4S,5S).
57. The method of claim 54 wherein X.sup.2 is selected from the
group consisting of halo, methanesulfonato, toluenesulfonato,
benzenesulfonato, and trifluoromethanesulfonato.
58. The method of claim 57 wherein X.sup.2 is selected from the
group consisting of chloro, bromo, and iodo.
59. The method of claim 58 wherein X.sup.2 is chloro.
60. The method of claim 54 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
61. The method of claim 60 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
62. The method of claim 61 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl.
63. The method of claim 61 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
64. The method of claim 54 wherein the contacting of the phenol
compound with the substituted xylene compound is performed in the
presence of a solvent.
65. The method of claim 64 wherein the solvent comprises an
amide.
66. The method of claim 65 wherein the amide is selected from the
group consisting of dimethylformamide and
N,N-dimethylacetamide.
67. The method of claim 54 wherein the contacting of the phenol
compound with the substituted xylene compound is performed in the
presence of a base.
68. The method of claim 67 wherein the base comprises a compound
selected from the group consisting of a metal hydroxide, a metal
alcoholate, a metal hydride, an alkyl metal complex, and an amide
base.
69. The method of claim 68 wherein the base comprises a metal
hydroxide.
70. The method of claim 2 further comprising a deprotecting step
wherein a protected phenol compound having the structure of Formula
(7) 142is deprotected to form a phenol compound having the
structure of Formula (4) 143wherein R.sup.6 is a protecting
group.
71. The method of claim 70 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group.
72. The method of claim 71 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl group.
73. The method of claim 72 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alkyl group.
74. The method of claim 73 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
75. The method of claim 71 wherein the deprotecting step comprises
treating the protected phenol compound with a deprotection
reagent.
76. The method of claim 75 wherein the deprotecting step comprises
treating the protected phenol compound with a deprotecting reagent
comprising a compound selected from the group consisting of a boron
trihalide, a hydrogen halide, and a metal hydrocarbyl thiolate.
77. The method of claim 76 wherein the deprotecting reagent is
selected from the group consisting of boron tribromide, boron
trichloride, hydrogen iodide, hydrogen bromide, and hydrogen
chloride.
78. The method of claim 77 wherein the deprotecting reagent is
selected from the group consisting of boron tribromide and boron
trichloride.
79. The method of claim 77 wherein the deprotecting reagent is
boron tribromide.
80. The method of claim 77 wherein the deprotecting reagent is a
metal hydrocarbyl thiolate.
81. The method of claim 80 wherein the deprotecting reagent is a
lithium hydrocarbyl thiolate.
82. The method of claim 81 wherein the deprotecting reagent is a
lithium C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl thiolate.
83. The method of claim 82 wherein the deprotecting reagent is
lithium ethanethiolate.
84. The method of claim 75 wherein the deprotecting reagent
comprises a sulfonic acid in combination with methionine.
85. The method of claim 84 wherein the deprotecting reagent
comprises methanesulfonic acid in combination with methionine.
86. The method of claim 85 wherein the deprotecting step is
performed substantially neat.
87. The method of claim 85 wherein the deprotecting step is
performed in the presence of a solvent.
88. The method of claim 87 wherein the solvent comprises a compound
selected from the group consisting of an alkane, an aromatic
solvent, a chlorinated solvent, a sulfonic acid, and an inorganic
solvent.
89. The method of claim 70 wherein the protected phenol compound
has an absolute configuration of (4R,5R).
90. The method of claim 70 wherein the protected phenol compound
has an absolute configuration of (4S,5S).
91. The method of claim 2 further comprising a cyclization step
wherein an amino sulfur oxide aldehyde compound having the
structure of Formula 144is treated under cyclization conditions to
form a protected phenol compound having the structure of Formula
(7a) 145wherein R.sup.6 is a protecting group, and y is 1 or 2.
92. The method of claim 91 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group.
93. The method of claim 92 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl group.
94. The method of claim 93 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alkyl group.
95. The method of claim 94 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
96. The method of claim 91 wherein the cyclization conditions
comprise treating the amino sulfur oxide aldehyde with a base.
97. The method of claim 96 wherein the base comprises a compound
selected from the group consisting of MOR.sup.11, a metal
hydroxide, and an alkyl metal complex, wherein R.sup.11 is a
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group and M is an alkali
metal.
98. The method of claim 97 wherein the base comprises
MOR.sup.11.
99. The method of claim 98 wherein M is selected from the group
consisting of sodium, lithium, and potassium.
100. The method of claim 98 wherein R.sup.11 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl group.
101. The method of claim 100 wherein R.sup.11 is a C.sub.1 to about
C5 alkyl group.
102. The method of claim 101 wherein R.sup.11 is selected from the
group consisting of methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, and tert-butyl.
103. The method of claim 102 wherein R.sup.11 is tert-butyl.
104. The method of claim 103 wherein the base is potassium
t-butoxide.
105. The method of claim 91 wherein the cyclization conditions
comprise a solvent.
106. The method of claim 105 wherein the solvent comprises a
hydrophilic solvent.
107. The method of claim 106 wherein the solvent is selected from
the group consisting of an ether and an alcohol.
108. The method of claim 106 wherein the solvent is an ether.
109. The method of claim 108 wherein the solvent is selected from
the group consisting of tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl
ether, methyl t-butyl ether, 1,4-dioxane, glyme, and diglyme.
110. The method of claim 109 wherein the solvent is
tetrahydrofuran.
111. The method of claim 107 wherein the solvent is an alcohol.
112. The method of claim 111 wherein the solvent is selected from
the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl
alcohol, butanol, sec-butyl alcohol, isobutyl alcohol, and t-butyl
alcohol.
113. The method of claim 91 wherein y is 1.
114. The method of claim 113 further comprising an oxidation step
in which the amino sulfur oxide aldehyde compound is treated under
oxidation conditions to form an amino sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (8) 146
115. The method of claim 91 wherein y is 2.
116. The method of claim 2 further comprising an reductive
alkylation step in which a nitro sulfur oxide aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (9a) 147is reductively alkylated to
form an amino sulfur oxide aldehyde compound having the structure
of Formula (8a) 148wherein R.sup.6 is a protecting group, and z is
0, 1, or 2.
117. The method of claim 116 wherein z is 0 or 1.
118. The method of claim 117 further comprising an oxidation step
in which the nitro sulfur oxide aldehyde compound is treated under
oxidation conditions to form a nitro sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (9) 149
119. The method of claim 116 wherein z is 2.
120. The method of claim 2 further comprising a step for the
preparation of an aniline sulfur oxide compound having the
structure of Formula (39) 150wherein the step comprises reducing a
nitro sulfur oxide aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula (9a) 151to form the aniline sulfur oxide compound, wherein
R.sup.6 is a protecting group, and z is 0, 1, or 2.
121. The method of claim 120 further comprising a methylation step
in which the aniline sulfur oxide compound is treated under
methylation conditions to form an amino sulfur oxide aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (8a) 152
122. The method of claim 2 further comprising an oxidation step in
which a nitro sulfide aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula (10) 153is oxidized to form a nitro sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (9a) 154wherein R.sup.6 is
a protecting group and z is 1 or 2.
123. The method of claim 122 wherein z is 2.
124. The method of claim 123 wherein z is 1.
125. The method of claim 124 in which the oxidation conditions
comprise enantioselective oxidation conditions.
126. The method of claim 2 further comprising a sulfide-forming
step in which a substituted diphenyl methane compound having the
structure of Formula (11) 155is coupled with a substituted
propionaldehyde compound having the structure of Formula (12) 156in
the presence of a source of sulfur to form a nitro sulfide aldehyde
having the structure of Formula (10) 157wherein R.sup.6 is a
protecting group; X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving
group; and X.sup.4 is a nucleophilic substitution leaving
group.
127. The method of claim 2 further comprising a reduction step in
which a substituted benzophenone compound having the structure of
Formula (13) 158is reduced to form a substituted diphenyl methane
compound having the structure of Formula (11) 159wherein R.sup.6 is
a protecting group and X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving
group.
128. The method of claim 2 further comprising an acylation step in
which a protected phenol compound having the structure of Formula
(14) 160is treated with a substituted benzoyl compound having the
structure of Formula (15) 161under acylation conditions to produce
a substituted benzophenone compound having the structure of Formula
(13) 162wherein R.sup.6 is a protecting group, X.sup.3 is an
aromatic substitution leaving group, and X.sup.5 is selected from
the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
129. The method of claim 2 further comprising one or more steps in
which an amino sulfone aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula (17) 163is prepared wherein an alkenyl sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (16) 164is reduced and
reductively alkylated to form the amino sulfone aldehyde compound
(17), wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl
group, R.sup.6 is a protecting group, and R.sup.12 is a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group.
130. The method of claim 2 further comprising a thermolysis step
wherein an acetal compound having the structure of Formula (18)
165is thermolyzed to form an alkenyl sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (16) 166wherein R.sup.1 is a
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl group; R.sup.6 is a
protecting group; R.sup.7 is selected from the group consisting of
H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl; and R.sup.13 is
selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
131. The method of claim 130 in which R.sup.13 is a group having
the structure of Formula (43) 167
132. The method of claim 2 further comprising an acetal-forming
step in which a monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde compound having the
structure of Formula (19) 168is reacted with an allyl alcohol
compound having the structure of Formula (20) 169optionally in the
presence of a hydroxylated solvent having the structure HOR.sup.13
to form an acetal compound having the structure of Formula (18)
170wherein: R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl;
R.sup.6 is a protecting group; R.sup.7 is selected from the group
consisting of H and a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl; and
R.sup.13 is selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
133. The method of claim 132 in which R.sup.13 is a group having
the structure of Formula (43) 171
134. The method of claim 133 wherein R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
135. The method of claim 134 wherein R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
136. The method of claim 135 wherein R.sup.7 is methyl.
137. The method of claim 2 further comprising a sulfone-forming
step in which a substituted diphenyl methane compound having the
structure of Formula (11) 172is reacted under sulfination
conditions and coupled with a 2-substituted acrolein compound
having the structure of Formula (21) 173to form a monoalkyl sulfone
aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula (19) 174wherein:
R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.6 is a
protecting group; and X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving
group.
138. A method for the preparation of a benzylammonium compound
having the structure of Formula (1) 175wherein the method comprises
the steps of: (a) treating a protected phenol compound having the
structure of Formula (14) 176 with a substituted benzoyl compound
having the structure of Formula (15) 177 under acylation conditions
to produce a substituted benzophenone compound having the structure
of Formula (13) 178(b) reducing the substituted benzophenone
compound to produce a substituted diphenyl methane compound having
the structure of Formula (11) 179(c) coupling the substituted
diphenyl methane compound with a substituted propionaldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (10) 180 in the presence
of a source of sulfur to form a nitro sulfide aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (10) 181(d) oxidizing the nitro
sulfide aldehyde compound to form a nitro sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (9) 182(e) reductively alkylating
the nitro sulfone aldehyde compound to form an amino sulfone
aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula (8) 183(f)
treating the amino sulfone aldehyde compound under cyclization
conditions to form protected phenol compound having the 184(g)
deprotecting the protected phenol compound to form a phenol
compound having the structure of Formula (4) 185(h) coupling the
phenol compound with a substituted xylene having the structure of
Formula (5) 186 under substitution conditions to produce a benzyl
alcohol ether compound having the structure of Formula (6) 187(i)
treating the benzyl alcohol ether compound with a leaving
group-forming reagent to produce a derivatized benzyl ether
compound having the structure of Formula (2) 188(j) treating the
derivatized benzyl ether compound with an amine having the
structure of Formula (42): 189 under amination conditions to
produce the benzylammonium compound; wherein: R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.3,
R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently are selected from the group
consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein
optionally one or more carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl is replaced
by O, N, or S, and wherein optionally two or more of R.sup.3,
R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 taken together with the atom to which they are
attached form a cyclic structure; R.sup.6 is a protecting group; X
and X.sup.4 independently are nucleophilic leaving groups; X.sup.2
is selected from the group consisting of chloro, bromo, iodo,
methanesulfonato, trifluoromethanesulfonato, benzenesulfonato, and
toluenesulfonato; X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving
group; and X.sup.5 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy
and halo.
139. The method of claim 138 further comprising an enantiomeric
enrichment step.
140. The method of claim 139 wherein the benzylammonium compound
produced by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
141. A method for the preparation of a derivatized benzyl ether
compound having the structure of Formula (2). 190wherein the method
comprises treating a benzyl alcohol ether compound having the
structure of Formula (6) 191with a halogenating agent to form the
derivatized benzyl ether compound, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, and X is
halo.
142. The method of claim 141 wherein the derivatized benzyl ether
compound produced by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
143. A method for the preparation of a benzyl alcohol ether
compound having the structure of Formula (6) 192wherein the method
comprises contacting a phenol compound having the structure of
Formula (4) 193with a substituted xylene compound having the
structure of Formula (5) 194under substitution conditions to
produce the benzyl alcohol ether compound, wherein R.sup.1 and
R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl,
and X.sup.2 is selected from the group consisting of chloro, bromo,
iodo, methanesulfonato, trifluoromethylsuflonato, and
toluenesulfonato.
144. The method of claim 143 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
145. The method of claim 144 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
146. The method of claim 145 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl.
147. The method of claim 145 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
148. The method of claim 143 wherein the contacting of the phenol
compound with the substituted xylene compound is performed in the
presence of a solvent.
149. The method of claim 148 wherein the solvent comprises a
compound selected from the group consisting of an aromatic solvent,
an amide, an ester, a ketone, an ether, and a sulfoxide.
150. The method of claim 149 wherein the solvent comprises an
amide.
151. The method of claim 150 wherein the amide is selected from the
group consisting of dimethylformamide and
N,N-dimethylacetamide.
152. The method of claim 149 wherein the solvent comprises an
aprotic solvent.
153. The method of claim 143 wherein the contacting of the phenol
compound with the substituted xylene compound is performed in the
presence of a base.
154. The method of claim 153 wherein the base comprises a compound
selected from the group consisting of a metal hydroxide, a metal
alcoholate, a metal hydride, an alkyl metal complex, and an amide
base.
155. The method of claim 154 wherein the base comprises a metal
hydroxide.
156. The method of claim 155 wherein the metal hydroxide is
selected from the group consisting of sodium hydroxide, lithium
hydroxide, and calcium hydroxide.
157. The method of claim 156 wherein the metal hydroxide is sodium
hydroxide.
158. The method of claim 143 wherein the benzyl alcohol ether
compound produced by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
159. A method for the preparation of a phenol compound having the
structure of Formula (4) 195wherein the method comprises
deprotecting a protected phenol compound having the structure of
Formula (7) 196to form the phenol compound, wherein R.sup.1 and
R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl,
and R.sup.6 is a protecting group.
160. The method of claim 159 wherein the phenol compound produced
by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that preponderates
over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
161. A method for the preparation of a protected phenol compound
having the structure of Formula (7) 197wherein the method comprises
cyclizing an amino sulfone aldehyde compound having the structure
of Formula (8) 198under cyclization conditions to form the
protected phenol compound, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, and
R.sup.6 is a protecting group.
162. The method of claim 161 wherein the protected phenol compound
produced by the method comprises a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
163. A method for the preparation of an amino sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (8) 199wherein the method
comprises reductively alkylating a nitro sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula (9) 200to form the amino sulfone
aldehyde compound, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, and R.sup.6 is a protecting
group.
164. A method for the preparation of a nitro sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (9) 201wherein the method
comprises oxidizing a nitro sulfide aldehyde compound having the
structure of Formula (10) 202to form the nitro sulfone aldehyde
compound, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, and R.sup.6 is a protecting group.
165. A method for the preparation of a nitro sulfide aldehyde
having the structure of Formula (10) 203wherein the method
comprises coupling a substituted diphenyl methane compound having
the structure of Formula (11) 204with a substituted propionaldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (12) 205in the presence of
a source of sulfur to form the nitro sulfide aldehyde, wherein:
R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl; R.sup.6 is a protecting group; X.sup.3 is an aromatic
substitution leaving group; and X.sup.4 is a nucleophilic
substitution leaving group.
166. A method for the preparation of a substituted diphenyl methane
compound having the structure of Formula (11) 206wherein the method
comprises reducing a substituted benzophenone compound having the
structure of Formula (13) 207to form the substituted diphenyl
methane compound, wherein: R.sup.6 is a protecting group; and
X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving group.
167. A method for the preparation of a substituted benzophenone
compound having the structure of Formula (13) 208wherein the method
comprises reacting a protected phenol compound having the structure
of Formula (14) 209with a substituted benzoyl compound having the
structure of Formula (15) 210under acylation conditions to produce
the substituted benzophenone compound, wherein: R.sup.6 is a
protecting group; X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving
group; X.sup.5 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy,
bromo, iodo, and --OR.sup.14; and R.sup.14 is an acyl group.
168. The method of claim 167 wherein X5 is hydroxy.
169. The method of claim 168 wherein the acylation conditions
comprise a strong protic acid.
170. The method of claim 169 wherein the strong protic acid is
selected from the group consisting of sulfuric acid, a sulfonic
acid, or a phosphorus oxy acid.
171. The method of claim 170 wherein the strong protic acid is a
phosphorus oxy acid.
172. The method of claim 171 wherein the phosphorus oxy acid is
selected from the group consisting of orthophosphoric acid,
pyrophosphoric acid, and polyphosphoric acid.
173. The method of claim 171 wherein the phosphorus oxy acid
comprises polyphosphoric acid.
174. The method of claim 167 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group.
175. The method of claim 174 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl group.
176. The method of claim 175 wherein R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alkyl group.
177. The method of claim 176 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
178. A method for the preparation of a substituted benzophenone
compound having the structure of Formula (13) 211wherein the method
comprises reacting an aryl metal complex having the structure of
Formula (56) 212with a substituted benzoyl compound having the
structure of Formula (15) 213under acylation conditions to produce
the substituted benzophenone compound, wherein: R.sup.6 is a
protecting group; L is a metal-containing moiety; X.sup.3 is an
aromatic substitution leaving group; X.sup.5 is selected from the
group consisting of halo and --OR.sup.14; and R.sup.14 is an acyl
group.
179. The method of claim 178 wherein L is selected from the group
consisting of MgX.sup.6, Na, and Li, wherein X.sup.6 is a
halogen.
180. A method for the preparation of an amino sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (17) 214wherein the method
comprises reducing and reductively alkylating an alkenyl sulfone
aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula (16) 215to form
the amino sulfone aldehyde compound wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl group; R.sup.6 is a protecting group;
and R.sup.7 is selected from the group consisting of H and C1 to
about C17 hydrocarbyl.
181. A method for the preparation of an alkenyl sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (16) 216wherein the method
comprises thermolyzing an acetal compound having the structure of
Formula (18) 217to form the alkenyl sulfone aldehyde compound,
wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl group;
R.sup.6 is a protecting group; R.sup.7 is selected from the group
consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl; and
R.sup.13 is selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
182. A method for the preparation of an acetal compound having the
structure of Formula (18) 218wherein the method comprises reacting
a monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula (19) 219with an allyl alcohol having the structure of
Formula (20) 220optionally in the presence of a hydroxylated
solvent having the structure HOR.sup.13 to form the acetal
compound, wherein: R.sup.1 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl; R.sup.6 is a protecting group; R.sup.7 is selected
from the group consisting of H and a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17
hydrocarbyl; and R.sup.13 is selected from the group consisting of
H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
183. The method of claim 182 in which R.sup.13 is a group having
the structure of Formula (43) 221
184. The method of claim 183 wherein R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
185. The method of claim 184 wherein R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
186. The method of claim 185 wherein R.sup.7 is methyl.
187. A method for the preparation of a monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula (19) 222wherein the method
comprises reacting a substituted diphenyl methane compound having
the structure of Formula (11) 223under sulfination conditions to
produce a sulfination mixture and contacting the sulfination
mixture with a 2-hydrocarbyl acrolein compound having the structure
of Formula (21) 224thereby forming the monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde
compound, wherein: R.sup.1 is a C to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl;
R.sup.6 is a protecting group; and X.sup.3 is an aromatic
substitution leaving group.
188. A method for the preparation of a 3-sulfur-propionaldehyde
olefin compound having the structure of Formula 49 225wherein the
method comprises contacting a 3-sulfur-propionaldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula 48 226with an allyl alcohol
compound having the structure of Formula 50 227in the presence of a
source of acid, thereby forming the 3-sulfur-propionaldehyde olefin
compound, wherein: R.sup.15 is selected from the group consisting
of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkylaryl, and
acyl, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl,
arylalkylaryl, and acyl optionally are substituted with at least
one R.sup.22 group; R.sup.16, R.sup.17, R.sup.21a, and R.sup.21b
are independently selected from the group consisting of H and
hydrocarbyl; R.sup.22 is selected from the group consisting of H,
--NO.sub.2, amino, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alkylamino, di(C.sub.1
to about C.sub.10)alkylamino, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkylthio,
hydroxy, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alkoxy, cyanato, isocyanato,
halogen, OR.sup.6, SR.sup.6, SR.sup.6R.sup.6a, and
NR.sup.6R.sup.6a; R.sup.6 and R.sup.6a independently are selected
from the group consisting of H and a protecting group; and q is 0,
1, or 2.
189. The method of claim 188 wherein R.sup.15 is selected from the
group consisting of aryl, alkylaryl, and arylalkylaryl.
190. The method of claim 188 wherein R.sup.15 is substituted with
at least one R.sup.22 group.
191. The method of claim 190 wherein R.sup.15 is arylalkylaryl
optionally substituted with at least one R.sup.22 group.
192. The method of claim 189 wherein R.sup.15 is
2-(phenylmethyl)phenyl.
193. The method of claim 192 wherein R.sup.15 is substituted with
at least one R.sup.22 group.
194. The method of claim 188 wherein R.sup.16 is hydrocarbyl.
195. The method of claim 194 wherein R.sup.16 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10hydrocarbyl.
196. The method of claim 195 wherein R.sup.16 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
197. The method of claim 196 wherein R.sup.16 is selected from the
group consisting of ethyl and butyl.
198. The method of claim 188 wherein R.sup.17 is hydrocarbyl.
199. The method of claim 188 wherein q is 2.
200. The method of claim 188 wherein the contacting is performed at
a temperature of about 0.degree. C. to about 200.degree. C.
201. The method of claim 200 wherein the contacting is performed at
a temperature of about 20.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C.
202. The method of claim 201 wherein the contacting is performed at
a temperature of about 30.degree. C. to about 135.degree. C.
203. The method of claim 202 wherein the contacting is performed at
a temperature of about 30.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C.
204. The method of claim 188 wherein the contacting is performed in
the presence of a solvent.
205. The method of claim 203 further comprising a step in which the
solvent is azeotropically removed.
206. A method of treating a diastereomer of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula
(22) 228wherein Formula (22) comprises a (4,5)-diastereomer
selected from the group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a
(4R,5R) diastereomer, a (4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R)
diastereomer, to produce a mixture comprising the (4S,5S)
diastereomer and the (4R,5R) diastereomer, wherein the method
comprises contacting a base with a feedstock composition comprising
the diastereomer of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound, thereby
producing a mixture of diastereomers of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound; and wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1
to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.8 is selected from the group
consisting of H, hydrocarbyl, heterocyclyl,
((hydroxyalkyl)aryl)-alkyl, ((cycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl,
((heterocycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl, ((quaternary
heterocycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl,
wherein hydrocarbyl, heterocycle, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl
optionally have one or more carbons replaced by a moiety selected
from the group consisting of O, NR.sup.3,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, S, SO, SO.sub.2,
S.sup.+R.sup.3A.sup.-, PR.sup.3, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
P(O)R.sup.3, phenylene, carbohydrate, amino acid, peptide, and
polypeptide, and R.sup.8 is optionally substituted with one or more
moieties selected from the group consisting of sulfoalkyl,
quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, OR.sup.3,
NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3,
S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
and C(O)OM; R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from
the substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M; A.sup.- is a
pharmaceutically acceptable anion and M is a pharmaceutically
acceptable cation; and R.sup.9 is selected from the group
consisting of H, hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl,
heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary
heteroaryl, OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3,
SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo, CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN,
halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
and C(O)OM; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently are
selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one or more carbon atom of
the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S, and wherein optionally
two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 taken together with
the atom to which they are attached form a cyclic structure; n is a
number from 0 to 4; and x is 1 or 2.
207. The method of claim 206 wherein the base is selected from the
group consisting of an alkali metal hydroxide, an alkaline earth
metal hydroxide, an alkali metal alkoxide, a metal hydride, an
alkali metal amide, and an alkali metal hydrocarbyl base.
208. The method of claim 207 wherein the base is selected from the
group consisting of an alkali metal hydroxide, an alkaline earth
metal hydroxide, an alkali metal alkoxide, and an alkali metal
amide.
209. The method of claim 208 wherein the base is an alkali metal
alkoxide.
210. The method of claim 209 wherein the base is selected from the
group consisting of a sodium alkoxide and a potassium alkoxide.
211. The method of claim 210 wherein the base is potassium
t-butoxide.
212. The method of claim 206 wherein R.sup.8 is selected from the
group consisting of H, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl,
hydroxyalkylarylalkyl, and heterocycloalkylalkylarylalkyl.
213. The method of claim 212 wherein R.sup.8 is selected from the
group consisting of H, and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl.
214. The method of claim 213 wherein R.sup.8 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 alkyl.
215. The method of claim 214 wherein R.sup.8 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl.
216. The method of claim 217 wherein R.sup.8 is C.sub.1 to about C5
alkyl.
217. The method of claim 214 wherein R.sup.8 is methyl.
218. The method of claim 206 wherein R.sup.9 is selected from the
group consisting of H, amino, alkylamino, alkoxy, and nitro.
219. The method of claim 218 wherein R.sup.9 is selected from the
group consisting of H and alkylamino.
220. The method of claim 219 wherein R.sup.9 is alkylamino.
221. The method of claim 219 wherein R.sup.9 is dimethylamino and n
is 1.
222. The method of claim 221 wherein R.sup.9 is in the 7-position
of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound.
223. The method of claim 206 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
224. The method of claim 206 wherein are both R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
are butyl.
225. The method of claim 206 wherein the (4,5)-diastereomer is
selected from the group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a
(4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R) diastereomer.
226. The method of claim 225 wherein the (4,5)-diastereomer is a
(4S,5S) diastereomer.
227. The method of claim 206 wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound has the structure of Formula (24) 229
228. The method of claim 206 wherein the feedstock composition
further comprises an amino sulfone aldehyde compound having the
structure of Formula (8) 230wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, and
R.sup.6 is a protecting group.
229. The method of claim 228 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10hydrocarbyl.
230. The method of claim 229 R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
231. The method of claim 230 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
232. The method of claim 231 wherein both R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are
butyl.
233. The method of claim 228 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
234. The method of claim 233 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
235. A method of treating a diastereomer of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula
(22) 231wherein Formula (22) comprises a (4,5)-diastereomer
selected from the group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a
(4R,5R) diastereomer, a (4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R)
diastereomer, to produce a mixture comprising the (4S,5S)
diastereomer and the (4R,5R) diastereomer, wherein the method
comprises treating the diastereomer of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound under elimination conditions to produce a
dihydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula (23)
232 and oxidizing the dihydrobenzothiepine compound thereby
producing the mixture comprising the (4S,5S) diastereomer and the
(4R,5R) diastereomer, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.8 is selected from the
group consisting of H, hydrocarbyl, heterocyclyl,
((hydroxyalkyl)aryl)alkyl, ((cycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl,
((heterocycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl, ((quaternary
heterocycloalkyl)alkylar- yl)alkyl, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl,
wherein hydrocarbyl, heterocycle, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl
optionally have one or more carbons replaced by a moiety selected
from the group consisting of O, NR.sup.3,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, S, SO, SO.sub.2,
S.sup.+R.sup.3A.sup.-, PR.sup.3, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
P(O)R.sup.3, phenylene, carbohydrate, amino acid, peptide, and
polypeptide, and R.sup.8 is optionally substituted with one or more
moieties selected from the group consisting of sulfoalkyl,
quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, OR.sup.3,
NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3,
S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
and C(O)OM; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently are
selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one or more carbon atom of
the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S, and wherein optionally
two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 taken together with
the atom to which they are attached form a cyclic structure;
R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from the
substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M; A.sup.- is a
pharmaceutically acceptable anion and M is a pharmaceutically
acceptable cation; and R.sup.9 is selected from the group
consisting of H, hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl,
heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary
heteroaryl, OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3,
SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo, CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN,
halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, S.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3,
R.sup.4A.sup.-, and C(O)OM; n is a number from 0 to 4; X.sup.7 is
selected from the group consisting of S, NH, and O; and x is 0, 1,
or 2.
236. The method of claim 235 wherein the elimination conditions
comprise an acid.
237. The method of claim 235 wherein the elimination conditions
comprise a base.
238. The method of claim 235 wherein the elimination conditions
comprise derivatizing the diastereomer of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound to form a tetrahydrobenzothiepine derivative having an
elimination-labile group at the 4-position, and eliminating the
elimination-labile group to form the dihydrobenzothiepine
compound.
239. The method of claim 235 wherein the oxidation step comprises
an alcohol-forming step in which the dihydrobenzothiepine compound
is reacted under alcohol-forming conditions to produce a mixture of
diastereomers of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound.
240. The method of claim 235 wherein the (4,5)-diastereomer is
selected from the group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a
(4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R) diastereomer.
241. The method of claim 240 wherein the (4,5)-diastereomer is a
(4S,5S) diastereomer.
242. The method of claim 235 wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound has the structure of Formula (24) 233and the
dihydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula (25)
234
243. A compound having the structure of Formula (2) 235wherein
R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl and X is selected from the group consisting of Br, I,
and a nucleophilic substitution leaving group covalently bonded to
the compound via an oxygen atom.
244. The compound of claim 243 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl.
245. The compound of claim 244 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl.
246. The compound of claim 245 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
is ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
247. The compound of claim 245 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl.
248. The compound of claim 243 wherein X is selected from the group
consisting of Br, I, and hydroxy.
249. The compound of claim 248 wherein X is selected from the group
consisting of Br and I.
250. The compound of claim 249 wherein X is chloro.
251. The compound of claim 248 wherein X is hydroxy.
252. The compound of claim 243 having the structure of Formula (26)
236
253. The compound of claim 252 having a (4R,5R) absolute
configuration.
254. The compound of claim 243 having the structure of Formula (27)
237
255. The compound of claim 254 having a (4R,5R) absolute
configuration.
256. A compound having the structure of Formula (28) 238
257. The compound of claim 256 having a (4R,5R) absolute
configuration.
258. A compound having the structure of Formula (24) 239wherein
Formula (22) represents a (4,5)-diastereomer selected from the
group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a (4R,5R) diastereomer,
a (4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R) diastereomer.
259. The compound of claim 258 wherein the (4,5)-diastereomer is a
(4R,5R) diastereomer.
260. A compound having the structure of Formula (29) 240
261. A compound having the structure of Formula (30) 241
262. 2-Bromomethyl-2-butylhexanal.
263. 2-Bromomethyl-2-butylhexanol.
264. 1-Acetato-2-butyl-2-(hydroxymethyl)hexane.
265. A compound having the structure of Formula (31) 242wherein
Formula (31) represents a compound having either an E or a Z
configuration about the butenyl double bond.
266. The compound of claim 265 having an E configuration about the
butenyl double bond.
267. The compound of claim 265 having a Z configuration about the
butenyl double bond.
268. A compound having the structure of Formula (32) 243
269. A compound having the structure of Formula (32) 244wherein
R.sup.6 is a protecting group and X.sup.3 is an aromatic
substitution leaving group.
270. The compound of claim 269 wherein X.sup.3 is a halo group.
271. The compound of claim 270 wherein X.sup.3 is chloro.
272. The compound of claim 269 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 alkyl.
273. The compound of claim 272 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10alkyl.
274. The compound of claim 273 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
Cs alkyl.
275. The compound of claim 274 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
276. A compound having the structure of Formula (13) 245wherein
R.sup.6 is a protecting group and X.sup.3 is an aromatic
substitution leaving group.
277. The compound of claim 276 wherein X.sup.3 is a halo group.
278. The compound of claim 277 wherein X.sup.3 is chloro.
279. The compound of claim 276 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 alkyl.
280. The compound of claim 279 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl.
281. The compound of claim 280 wherein R.sup.6 is C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alkyl.
282. The compound of claim 281 wherein R.sup.6 is methyl.
283. A method for the preparation of a substituted propionaldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula 12 246wherein the method
comprises oxidizing a substituted propanol compound having the
structure of Formula 35 247wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl and X.sup.4
is a nucleophilic substitution leaving group.
284. The method of claim 283 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
285. The method of claim 284 wherein the substituted
propionaldehyde compound has an R absolute configuration.
286. The method of claim 284 wherein the substituted
propionaldehyde compound has an S absolute configuration.
287. The method of claim 283 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl.
288. The method of claim 283 further comprising a step in which an
acid ester having the structure of Formula 36 248is solvolyzed to
form the substituted propanol compound, wherein R.sup.10 is a
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl group.
289. The method of claim 283 wherein X.sup.4 is halo.
290. The method of claim 289 wherein X.sup.4 is bromo.
291. The method of claim 289 further comprising a step in which a
diol compound having the structure of Formula 37 249is reacted in
the presence of carbonyl compound having the structure of Formula
38 250and a source of halide to form the acid ester, wherein
X.sup.6 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halogen,
and --OC(O)R.sup.18, wherein R.sup.18 is C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl.
292. The method of claim 291 wherein the source of halide is
selected from the group consisting of a source of HBr and a source
of HI.
293. The method of claim 292 wherein the source of halide is a
source of HBr.
294. A method for the preparation of a substituted propionaldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula 12 251wherein the method
comprises the steps of: (a) reacting a diol compound having the
structure of Formula 37 252 in the presence of a carbonyl compound
having the structure of Formula 38 253 and a source of halide to
form an acid ester having the structure of Formula 36 254(b)
solvolyzing the acid ester to form a substituted propanol compound
having the structure of Formula 35 255(c) oxidizing the substituted
propanol compound to form the substituted propionaldehyde compound;
wherein: R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.10, and R.sup.18 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; X.sup.4 is a nucleophilic
substitution leaving group; and X.sup.6 is selected from the group
consisting of hydroxy, halo, and --OC(O)R.sup.18.
295. The method of claim 294 wherein the carboxylic acid equivalent
is a carbonyl compound having the structure of Formula 38
256wherein X.sup.6 is selected from the group consisting of
hydroxy, halo, and --OC(O)R.sup.18.
296. The method of claim 295 wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.10,
and R.sup.11 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
hydrocarbyl.
297. The method of claim 296 wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.10,
and R.sup.18 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5
hydrocarbyl.
298. The method of claim 297 wherein one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl.
299. The method of claim 297 wherein both R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are
butyl.
300. The method of claim 299 wherein R.sup.10 is methyl.
301. The method of claim 297 wherein R.sup.18 is methyl.
302. The method of claim 301 wherein X.sup.4 is halo.
303. The method of claim 302 wherein X.sup.4 is bromo.
304. The method of claim 303 wherein X.sup.6 is hydroxy.
305. A crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound
having the structure of Formula 71 257or an enantiomer thereof
wherein the crystalline form has a melting point or a decomposition
point of about 278.degree. C. to about 285.degree. C.
306. The crystalline form of claim 305 wherein the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has an absolute configuration
predominantly of (4R,5R).
307. The crystalline form of claim 305 having a melting point or a
decomposition point of about 280.degree. C. to about 283.degree.
C.
308. The crystalline form of claim 307 having a melting point or a
decomposition point of about 282.degree. C.
309. The crystalline form of claim 305 having an X-ray powder
diffraction pattern with peaks at about 9.2 degrees 2 theta, about
12.3 degrees 2 theta, and about 13.9 degrees 2 theta.
310. The crystalline form of claim 309 wherein the X-ray powder
diffraction pattern substantially lacks peaks at about 7.2 degrees
2 theta and at about 11.2 degrees 2 theta.
311. The crystalline form of claim 305 having an X-ray powder
diffraction pattern substantially as shown in plot (b) of FIG.
6.
312. The crystalline form of claim 305 having an IR spectrum with a
peak at 10 about 3245 cm.sup.-1 to about 3255 cm.sup.-1.
313. The crystalline form of claim 312 having an IR spectrum with a
peak at about 1600 cm.sup.-1.
314. The crystalline form of claim 312 having an IR spectrum with a
peak at about 1288 cm.sup.-1.
315. The crystalline form of claim 312 having an IR spectrum
substantially as shown in plot (b) of FIG. 7.
316. The crystalline form of claim 305 having a solid state
carbon-13 NMR spectrum with peaks at about 142.3 ppm, about 137.2
ppm, and about 125.4 ppm.
317. The crystalline form of claim 305 having a solid state
carbon-13 NMR spectrum substantially as shown in plot (b) of FIG.
8.
318. The crystalline form of claim 305 that after an essentially
dry sample of the crystalline form is equilibrated under about 80%
relative humidity air at 25.degree. C. gains less than 1% of its
own weight.
319. The crystalline form of claim 305 that is essentially
nonhygroscopic.
320. A crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound
wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of
Formula 71 258and that after a sample of the crystalline form is
dried at essentially 0% relative humidity at about 25.degree. C.
under a purge of essentially dry nitrogen until the sample exhibits
essentially no weight change as a function of time, the sample
gains less than 1% of its own weight when equilibrated under about
80% relative humidity air at about 25.degree. C.
321. A crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound
wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of
Formula 71 259and wherein the crystalline form is produced by
crystallizing the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a solvent
comprising methyl ethyl ketone.
322. A method for the preparation of a crystalline form of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula 63
260wherein the method comprises crystallizing the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a solvent comprising methyl
ethyl ketone, and wherein: R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and
R.sup.5 independently are selected from the group consisting of H
and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one
or more carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S,
and wherein optionally two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
taken together with the atom to which they are attached form a
cyclic structure; R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of
H, hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, heterocyclyl,
heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl,
OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-,
SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
and C(O)OM; R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from
the substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M; n is a number from 0
to 4; A.sup.- and Z.sup.- independently are pharmaceutically
acceptable anions; and M is a pharmaceutically acceptable
cation.
323. The method of claim 322 wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound has the structure of Formula 64 261
324. The method of claim 323 wherein the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound has the structure of Formula 41 262
325. A method for the preparation of a product crystal form of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the compound structure of
Formula 41 263wherein the product crystal form has a melting point
or a decomposition point of about 278.degree. C. to about
285.degree. C., wherein the method comprises applying heat to an
initial crystal form of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound
wherein the initial crystal form has a melting point or a
decomposition point of about 220.degree. C. to about 235.degree.
C., thereby forming the product crystal form.
326. The method of claim 325 wherein the initial crystal form is
heated to a temperature from about 20.degree. C. to about
150.degree. C.
327. The method of claim 326 wherein the initial crystal form is
heated to a temperature from about 50.degree. C. to about
125.degree. C.
328. The method of claim 327 wherein the initial crystal form is
heated to a temperature from about 60.degree. C. to about
100.degree. C.
329. The method of claim 325 wherein the method further comprises a
cooling step after the step in which the initial crystal form is
heated.
330. The method of claim 325 further comprising mixing the initial
crystal form with a solvent.
331. The method of claim 330 wherein the solvent comprises a
ketone.
332. The method of claim 331 wherein the ketone is selected from
the group consisting of methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, and methyl
isobutyl ketone.
333. The method of claim 332 wherein the ketone is methyl ethyl
ketone.
334. The method of claim 332 wherein the ketone is acetone.
335. The method of claim 332 wherein the ketone is methyl isobutyl
ketone.
336. The method of claim 330 wherein the method further comprises a
cooling step after the step in which the initial crystal form is
heated.
Description
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0001] 1. Field of the Invention
[0002] This invention relates to the preparation of apical sodium
co-dependent bile acid transporter (ASBT) inhibitors and more
particularly to the preparation of benzothiepine ASBT inhibitors.
This invention especially relates to methods of preparing
tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxide ASBT inhibitors.
[0003] 2. Description of Related Art
[0004] It is well established that agents which inhibit the
transport of bile acids across the tissue of the ileum can also
cause a decrease in the levels of cholesterol in blood serum.
Stedronski, in "Interaction of bile acids and cholesterol with
nonsystemic agents having hypocholesterolemic properties,"
Biochirnica et Biophysica Acta, 1210 (1994) 255-287 discusses
biochemistry, physiology, and known active agents surrounding bile
acids and cholesterol. Bile acids are actively transported across
the tissue of the ileum by an apical sodium co-dependent bile acid
transporter (ASBT), alternatively known as an ileal bile acid
transporter (IBAT).
[0005] A class of ASBT-inhibiting compounds that was recently
discovered to be useful for influencing the level of blood serum
cholesterol comprises tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxides (THBO
compounds, PCT Patent Application No. WO 96/08484). Further THBO
compounds useful as ASBT inhibitors are described in PCT Patent
Application No. WO 97/33882. Additional THBO compounds useful as
ASBT inhibitors are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,994,391. Still
further THBO compounds useful as ASBT inhibitors are described in
PCT Patent Application No. WO 99/64409. Included in the THBO class
are tetrahydrobenzo thiepine-1-oxides and
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxides. THBO compounds possess
chemical structures in which a phenyl ring is fused to a
seven-member ring.
[0006] Published methods for the preparation of THBO compounds
include the synthesis through an aromatic sulfone aldehyde
intermediate. For example
1-(2,2-dibutyl-3-oxopropylsulfonyl)-2-((4-methoxyphenyl)methyl)benzene
(29) was cyclized with potassium t-butoxide to form
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide (syn-24) as shown in Eq. 1.
1
[0007] Compound 29 was prepared by reacting 2-chloro-5-nitrobenzoic
acid chloride with anisole in the presence of aluminum trichloride
to produce a chlorobenzophenone compound; the chlorobenzophenone
compound was reduced in the presence of trifluoromethanesulfonic
acid and triethylsilane to produce a chlorodiphenylmethane
compound; the chlorodiphenylmethane compound was treated with
lithium sulfide and 2,2-dibutyl-3-(methanesulfonato)propanal to
produce
1-(2,2-dibutyl-3-oxopropylthio)-2-((4-methoxyphenyl)methyl)-4-dimethylami-
nobenzene (40); and 40 was oxidized with m-chloroperbenzoic acid to
produce 29. The first step of that method of preparing compound 29
requires the use of a corrosive and reactive carboxylic acid
chloride that was prepared by the reaction of the corresponding
carboxylic acid with phosphorus pentachloride. Phosphorus
pentachloride readily hydrolyzes to produce volatile and hazardous
hydrogen chloride. The reaction of
2,2-dibutyl-3-(methanesulfonato)propanal with the lithium sulfide
and the chlorodiphenylmethane compound required the intermediacy of
a cyclic tin compound to make the of
2,2-dibutyl-3-(methanesulfonato)p- ropanal. The tin compound is
expensive and creates a toxic waste stream.
[0008] In WO 97/33882 compound svn-24 was dealkylated using boron
tribromide to produce the phenol compound 28. Boron tribromide is a
corrosive and hazardous material that generates hydrogen bromide
gas and requires special handling. Upon hydrolysis, boron
tribromide also produces borate salts that are costly and
time-consuming to separate and dispose of. 2
[0009] An alternative method of preparing THBO compounds was
described in WO 97/33882, wherein a 1,3-propanediol was reacted
with thionyl chloride to form a cyclic sulfite compound. The cyclic
sulfite compound was oxidized to produce a cyclic sulfate compound.
The cyclic sulfate was condensed with a 2-methylthiophenol that had
been deprotonated with sodium hydride. The product of the
condensation was a (2-methylphenyl) (3'-hydroxypropyl)thioether
compound. The thioether compound was oxidized to form an thioether
aldehyde compound. The thioether aldehyde compound was further
oxidized to form an aldehyde sulfone compound which in turn was
cyclized in the presence of potassium t-butoxide to form a
4-hydroxytetrahydrobenzothiepine 1,1-dioxide compound. This cyclic
sulfate route to THBO compounds requires an expensive catalyst.
Additionally it requires the use of SOCl.sub.2, which in turn
requires special equipment to handle.
[0010] PCT Patent Application No. WO 97/33882 describes a method by
which the phenol compound 28 was reacted at its phenol hydroxyl
group to attach a variety of functional groups to the molecule,
such as a quaternary ammonium group. For example, (4R,5R)-28 was
reacted with 1,4-bis(chloromethyl)benzene (?,??'-dichloro-p-xylene)
to produce the chloromethyl benzyl ether (4R,5R)-27. Compound
(4R,5R)-27 was treated with diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) to
produce (4R,5R)-1-((4-(4-(3,3-d-
ibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-1,1-dioxido-1-benzot-
hiepin-5-yl)phenoxy)methyl)phenyl)methyl-4-aza-1-azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-
e chloride (41). This method suffers from low yields because of a
propensity for two molecules of compound (4R,5R)-28 to react with
one molecule of 1.4-bis(chloromethyl)benzene to form a
bis(benzothiepine) adduct. Once the bis-adduct forms the reactive
chloromethyl group of compound (4R,5R)-27 is not available to react
with an amine to form the quaternary ammonium product. 3
[0011] A method of preparing enantiomerically enriched
tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxides is described in PCT Patent
Application No. WO 99/32478. In that method, an
aryl-3-hydroxypropylsulfide compound was oxidized with an
asymmetric oxidizing agent, for example
(1R)-(-)-(8,9-dichloro-10-camphorsulfonyl)oxaziridine, to yield a
chiral aryl-3-hydroxypropylsulfoxide. Reaction of the
aryl-3-hydroxypropylsulfox- ide with an oxidizing agent such as
sulfur trioxide pyridine complex yielded an
aryl-3-propanalsulfoxide. The aryl-3-propanalsulfoxide was cyclized
with a base such as potassium t-butoxide to enantioselectively
produce a tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1-oxide. The
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1-- oxide was further oxidized to produce a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxid- e. Although this method could
produce tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide compounds of high
enantiomeric purity, it requires the use of an expensive asymmetric
oxidizing agent.
[0012] Some 5-amidobenzothiepine compounds and methods to make them
are described in PCT Patent Application Number WO 92/18462.
[0013] In Synlett, 9, 943-944(1995) 2-bromophenyl
3-benzoyloxy-1-buten-4-y- l sulfone was treated with tributyl tin
hydride and AIBN to produce
3-benzoyloxytetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0014] The ongoing work in the area of tetrahydrobenzothiepine
synthesis and the utility of
4-hydroxy-5-phenyltetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide compounds as
cholesterol-lowering therapeutics point to the continuing need for
economical and practical methods to prepare these compounds.
[0015] We now report a novel method for preparing
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compounds. Among the several embodiments of
the present invention may be noted the provision of an improved
process for the preparation of tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dioxide
compounds; the provision of a process for preparing a
diastereomeric mixture of tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-dio- xide
compounds from a single diastereomer of such compounds; the
provision of a process for the preparation of 3-bromo-2-substituted
propionaldehyde compounds; and the provision of a process for the
preparation of 3-thio-2-substituted propionaldehyde compounds.
[0016] Briefly, therefore, the present invention is directed to a
method for the preparation of a benzylammonium compound having the
structure of Formula 60 4
[0017] wherein the method comprises treating a benzyl alcohol ether
compound having the structure of Formula 61 5
[0018] under derivatization conditions to form a derivatized benzyl
ether compound having the structure of Formula 62 6
[0019] and contacting the derivatized benzyl ether compound with an
amine having the structure of Formula 42 7
[0020] under amination conditions thereby producing the
benzylammonium compound or a derivative thereof, wherein:
[0021] R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl;
[0022] R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently are selected
from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one or more carbon atom of the
hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S, and wherein optionally two
or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 taken together with the
atom to which they are attached form a cyclic structure;
[0023] R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of H,
hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, heterocyclyl,
heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl,
OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.- sup.5A.sup.-,
SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24, P.sup.+R.sup.3,
R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, and
C(O)OM;
[0024] R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from the
substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M;
[0025] n is a number from 0 to 4;
[0026] A.sup.- is a pharmaceutically acceptable anion and M is a
pharmaceutically acceptable cation; and
[0027] X is a nucleophilic substitution leaving group.
[0028] The present invention is also directed to a method for the
preparation of a benzylammonium compound having the structure of
Formula 1 8
[0029] wherein the method comprises treating a benzyl alcohol ether
compound having the structure of Formula 6 9
[0030] under derivatization conditions to form a derivatized benzyl
ether compound having the structure of Formula 2 10
[0031] and contacting the derivatized benzyl ether compound with an
amine having the structure of Formula 42: 11
[0032] under amination conditions thereby producing the
benzylammonium compound or a derivative thereof, wherein R.sup.1,
R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5, and X are defined above.
[0033] The invention is further directed to a method for the
preparation of a benzylammonium compound having the structure of
Formula 1 wherein the method comprises the steps of: treating a
protected phenol compound having the structure of Formula 14 12
[0034] with a substituted benzoyl compound having the structure of
Formula 15 13
[0035] under acylation conditions to produce a substituted
benzophenone compound having the structure of Formula 13 14
[0036] reducing the substituted benzophenone compound to produce a
substituted diphenyl methane compound having the structure of
Formula 11 15
[0037] coupling the substituted diphenyl methane compound with a
substituted propionaldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula 12 16
[0038] in the presence of a source of sulfur to form a nitro
sulfide aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula 10 17
[0039] oxidizing the nitro sulfide aldehyde compound to form a
nitro sulfone aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula 9
18
[0040] reductively alkylating the nitro sulfone aldehyde compound
to form an amino sulfone aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula 8 19
[0041] treating the amino sulfone aldehyde compound under
cyclization conditions to form protected phenol compound having the
structure of Formula 7 20
[0042] deprotecting the protected phenol compound to form a phenol
compound having the structure of Formula 4 21
[0043] coupling the phenol compound with a substituted xylene
having the structure of Formula 5 22
[0044] under substitution conditions to produce a benzyl alcohol
ether compound having the structure of Formula 6 treating the
benzyl alcohol ether compound under derivatization conditions to
produce a derivatized benzyl ether compound having the structure of
Formula 2; and treating the derivatized benzyl ether compound with
an amine having the structure of Formula 42 under amination
conditions to produce the benzylammonium compound 1; wherein:
R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 are as defined
above; R6 is a protecting group, X and X.sup.4 independently are
nucleophilic substitution leaving groups, X.sup.2 is selected from
the group consisting of chloro, bromo, iodo, methanesulfonato,
toluenesulfonato, benzenesulfonato, and trifluoromethanesulfonato;
X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving group; and X.sup.5 is
selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
[0045] The present invention is also directed to a method for the
preparation of a benzylammonium compound having the structure of
Formula 1 wherein the method comprises a step in which an acetal
compound having the structure of Formula 18 23
[0046] is thermolyzed to form an alkenyl sulfone aldehyde compound
having the structure of Formula 16 24
[0047] wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.6 are as defined above; R.sup.7 is
selected from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl; and R.sup.13 is selected from the group
consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl.
[0048] In another embodiment, the present invention is directed to
a method of treating a diastereomer of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound having the structure of Formula 22 25
[0049] wherein Formula 22 comprises a (4,5)-diastereomer selected
from the group consisting of a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a (4R,5R)
diastereomer, a (4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R) diastereomer,
to produce a mixture comprising the (4S,5S) diastereomer and the
(4R,5R) diastereomer, wherein the method comprises contacting a
base with a feedstock composition comprising the diastereomer of
the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound, thereby producing a mixture
of diastereomers of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound; and
wherein:
[0050] R.sup.8 is selected from the group consisting of H,
hydrocarbyl, heterocycle, ((hydroxyalkyl)aryl)alkyl,
((cycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl, ((heterocycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl,
((quaternary heterocycloalkyl)alkylar- yl)alkyl, heteroaryl,
quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary
heteroarylalkyl,
[0051] wherein hydrocarbyl, heterocycle, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl
optionally have one or more carbons replaced by a moiety selected
from the group consisting of O, NR.sup.3,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, S, SO, SO.sub.2,
S.sup.+R.sup.3A.sup.-, P.sup.+R.sup.3, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.s-
up.-, P(O)R.sup.3, phenylene, carbohydrate, amino acid, peptide,
and polypeptide, and
[0052] R.sup.8 is optionally substituted with one or more moieties
selected from the group consisting of sulfoalkyl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
N.sup.+l R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3,
SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo, CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN,
halogen, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM, SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.sup.5A.sup.-,
S.sup.+R.sup.+R.sup.4A.sup.-, and C(O)OM;
[0053] R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5, R.sup.9,
R.sup.23 and R.sup.24, n, A.sup.-, and M are as defined above;
[0054] X.sup.7 is S, NH, or O; and
[0055] x is 1 or 2.
[0056] In yet another embodiment, the present invention is directed
to a method of treating a diastereomer of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound having the structure of Formula (22), wherein the method
comprises treating the diastereomer of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound under elimination conditions to produce a
dihydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula 23
26
[0057] and oxidizing the dihydrobenzothiepine compound to produce
the mixture of diastereomers, wherein:
[0058] R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.8, R.sup.9, X.sup.7, and n are as
defined above; and
[0059] x is 0, 1, or 2.
[0060] Another embodiment of the present invention is directed to a
method for the preparation of a substituted propionaldehyde
compound having the structure of Formula 12 wherein the method
comprises oxidizing a substituted propanol compound having the
structure of Formula 35 27
[0061] wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are as defined above, and
X.sup.4 is a nucleophilic substitution leaving group.
[0062] In another embodiment, the present invention is directed
toward a compound having the structure of Formula (2) wherein
R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl and X is selected from the group consisting of Br, I,
and a nucleophilic substitution leaving group covalently bonded to
the compound via an oxygen atom.
[0063] In another embodiment, the present invention provides a
crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the
structure of Formula 71 28
[0064] or an enantiomer thereof wherein the crystalline form has a
melting point or a decomposition point of about 278.degree. C. to
about 285.degree. C.
[0065] Another embodiment of the present invention provides a
crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 71
and which after a sample of the crystalline form is dried at
essentially 0% relative humidity at about 25.degree. C. under a
purge of essentially dry nitrogen until the sample exhibits
essentially no weight change as a function of time, the sample
gains less than 1% of its own weight when equilibrated under about
80% relative humidity air at about 25.degree. C. Preferably the
crystal form of the present invention comprises a
(4R,5R)-enantiomer of compound 71.
[0066] Still another embodiment of the present invention provides a
crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 71 or
an enantiomer thereof and wherein the crystalline form is produced
by crystallizing the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a
solvent comprising methyl ethyl ketone. Preferably the crystal form
of the present invention comprises a (4R,5R)-enantiomer of compound
71.
[0067] In another embodiment, the present invention provides a
method for the preparation of a crystalline form of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the structure of Formula 63
29
[0068] wherein the method comprises crystallizing the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a solvent comprising a ketone
(for example methyl ethyl ketone or acetone, preferably methyl
ethyl ketone), and wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4,
R.sup.5, R.sup.9, and n are defined above. In Formula 63 Q.sup.- is
a pharmaceutically acceptable anion.
[0069] In another embodiment, the present invention provides a
method for the preparation of a product crystal form of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the compound structure of
Formula 41 wherein the product crystal form has a melting point or
a decomposition point of about 278.degree. C. to about 285.degree.
C., wherein the method comprises applying heat to an initial
crystal form of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein the
initial crystal form has a melting point or a decomposition point
of about 220.degree. C. to about 235.degree. C., thereby forming
the product crystal form.
[0070] Further scope of the applicability of the present invention
will become apparent from the detailed description provided below.
However, it should be understood that the following detailed
description and examples, while indicating preferred embodiments of
the invention, are given by way of illustration only since various
changes and modifications within the spirit and scope of the
invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from
this detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
[0071] FIG. 1 shows an overall process by which substituted
propionaidehyde compound 12 can be prepared.
[0072] FIG. 1a shows a representative overall process by which
nitro sulfide acetal compound 67 can be prepared and by which
compound 67 can be used to produce compound 29.
[0073] FIG. 2 shows a process by which
2,2-dibutyl-3-bromopropionaldehyde can be prepared using the
methods of the present invention.
[0074] FIG. 3 shows an overall process for the preparation of
benzylammonium compound 1.
[0075] FIG. 4 shows an overall process for the preparation of
diphenyl methane compound 11.
[0076] FIG. 5 shows a method in which an enantiomerically enriched
tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxide 24 (for example (4R,5R)-24) can be
used in combination with the methods of the present invention to
prepare an enantiomerically enriched benzylammonium compound.
[0077] FIG. 6 shows representative X-ray powder diffraction
patterns for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot (b)) of compound
41. Horizontal axis values are in degrees 2 theta.
[0078] FIG. 7 shows representative Fourier transform infrared
(FTIR) spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot (b)) of
compound 41. Horizontal axis values are in cm.sup.-1.
[0079] FIG. 8 shows representative solid state carbon-13 nuclear
magnetic resonance (NMR) spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II
(plot (b)) of compound 41. Horizontal axis values are in ppm.
[0080] FIG. 9 shows representative differential scanning
calorimetry profiles for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot (b))
of compound 41.
[0081] FIG. 10 shows water sorption isotherms for Form I (plot (a))
and Form II (plot(b)) of compound 41.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
[0082] The following detailed description is provided to aid those
skilled in the art in practicing the present invention. Even so,
this detailed description should not be construed to unduly limit
the present invention as modifications and variations in the
embodiments discussed herein can be made by those of ordinary skill
in the art without departing from the spirit or scope of the
present inventive discovery.
[0083] The contents of each of the references cited herein,
including the contents of the references cited within these primary
references, are herein incorporated by reference in their
entirety.
[0084] a. Definitions
[0085] The following definitions are provided in order to aid the
reader in understanding the detailed description of the present
invention:
[0086] "Hydrocarbyl" means an organic chemical group composed of
carbon and hydrogen atoms. Without meaning to limit its definition,
the term hydrocarbyl includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl,
cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, alkylarylalkyl, carbocycle, and
polyalkyl.
[0087] "Alkyl," "alkenyl," and "alkynyl" unless otherwise noted are
each straight chain or branched chain hydrocarbon groups of from
one to about twenty carbons for alkyl or two to about twenty
carbons for alkenyl and alkynyl in the present invention and
therefore mean, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl
or hexyl and ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, or hexenyl and
ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, or hexynyl respectively and
isomers thereof.
[0088] "Aryl" means a fully unsaturated mono- or multi-ring
carbocycle, including, but not limited to, substituted or
unsubstituted phenyl, naphthyl, or anthracenyl.
[0089] "Heterocycle" means a saturated or unsaturated mono- or
multi-ring carbocycle wherein one or more carbon atoms can be
replaced by N, S, P, or O. This includes, for example, the
following structures: 30
[0090] wherein Z, Z.sup.1, Z.sup.2 or Z.sup.3 is C, S, P, O, or N,
with the proviso that one of Z, Z.sup.1, Z.sup.2 or Z.sup.3 is
other than carbon, but is not O or S when attached to another Z
atom by a double bond or when attached to another O or S atom.
Furthermore, the optional substituents are understood to be
attached to Z, Z.sup.1, Z.sup.2 or Z.sup.3 only when each is C.
[0091] The term "heteroaryl" means a fully unsaturated
heterocycle.
[0092] In either "heterocycle" or "heteroaryl," the point of
attachment to the molecule of interest can be at the heteroatom or
elsewhere within the ring.
[0093] The term "quaternary heterocycle" means a heterocycle in
which at least one heteroatom, for example, O, N, S, or P, has such
a number of bonds that the heteroatom is positively charged. The
point of attachment of the quaternary heterocycle to the molecule
of interest can be at a heteroatom or elsewhere.
[0094] The term "quaternary heteroaryl" means a heteroaryl in which
at least one heteroatom, for example, O, N, S, or P, has such a
number of bonds that the heteroatom is positively charged. The
point of attachment of the quaternary heteroaryl to the molecule of
interest can be at a heteroatom or elsewhere.
[0095] The term "halogen" means a fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo
group.
[0096] The term "haloalkyl" means alkyl substituted with one or
more halogens.
[0097] The term "cycloalkyl" means a mono- or multi-ringed
carbocycle wherein each ring contains three to ten carbon atoms,
and wherein any ring can contain one or more double or triple
bonds. Examples include radicals such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl,
cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloalkenyl, and cycloheptyl. The term
"cycloalkyl" additionally encompasses spiro systems wherein the
cycloalkyl ring has a carbon ring atom in common with the
seven-membered heterocyclic ring of the benzothiepine.
[0098] The term "oxo" means a doubly bonded oxygen.
[0099] The term "polyalkyl" means a branched or straight
hydrocarbon chain having a molecular weight up to about 20,000,
more preferably up to about 10,000, most preferably up to about
5,000.
[0100] The term "arylalkyl" means an aryl-substituted alkyl radical
such as benzyl. The term "alkylarylalkyl" means an arylalkyl
radical that is substituted on the aryl group with one or more
alkyl groups.
[0101] The term "heterocyclylalkyl" means an alkyl radical that is
substituted with one or more heterocycle groups. Preferable
heterocyclylalkyl radicals are "lower heterocyclylalkyl" radicals
having one or more heterocycle groups attached to an alkyl radical
having one to ten carbon atoms.
[0102] The term "heteroarylalkyl" means an alkyl radical that is
substituted with one or more heteroaryl groups. Preferable
heteroarylalkyl radicals are "lower heteroarylalkyl" radicals
having one or more heteroaryl groups attached to an alkyl radical
having one to ten carbon atoms.
[0103] The term "quaternary heterocyclylalkyl" means an alkyl
radical that is substituted with one or more quaternary heterocycle
groups. Preferable quaternary heterocyclylalkyl radicals are "lower
quaternary heterocyclylalkyl" radicals having one or more
quaternary heterocycle groups attached to an alkyl radical having
one to ten carbon atoms.
[0104] The term "quaternary heteroarylalkyl" means an alkyl radical
that is substituted with one or more quaternary heteroaryl groups.
Preferable quaternary heteroarylalkyl radicals are "lower
quaternary heteroarylalkyl" radicals having one or more quaternary
heteroaryl groups attached to an alkyl radical having one to ten
carbon atoms.
[0105] The term "alkoxy" means a radical comprising an alkyl
radical that is bonded to an oxygen atom, such as a methoxy
radical. More preferred alkoxy radicals are "lower alkoxy" radicals
having one to ten carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include
methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy and tert-butoxy.
[0106] The term "carboxy" means the carboxy group, --CO.sub.2H, or
its salts.
[0107] The term "carboalkoxyalkyl" means an alkyl radical that is
substituted with one or more alkoxycarbonyl groups. Preferable
carboalkoxyalkyl radicals are "lower carboalkoxyalkyl" radicals
having one or more alkoxycarbonyl groups attached to an alkyl
radical having one to six carbon atoms.
[0108] When used in combination, for example "alkylaryl" or
"arylalkyl." the individual terms listed above have the meaning
indicated above.
[0109] As used herein, Me means methyl; Et means ethyl; Pr means
propyl; i-Pr or Pr.sup.i each means isopropyl; Bu means butyl; t-Bu
or But each means tert-butyl; Py means pyridine.
[0110] The term "derivative" means a compound containing a
structural moiety similar to that of another chemical. The term
derivative includes, for example, a conjugate acid, a conjugate
base, a free base, a free acid, a racemate, a salt, an ester, a
compound protected with a protecting group, a tautomer, a
stereoisomer, a substituted compound, and a prodrug.
[0111] The term "stereoisomer," where a compound has at least one
chiral center, includes each enantiomer and each diastereomer.
Where a compound has an aliphatic double bond, the term
"stereoisomer" includes each cis or Z isomer as well as each trans
or E isomer.
[0112] In structural drawings, when a chemical bond is represented
as an open wedge, such a representation means that the bond can
either go into the plane of the page or come out of the plane of
the page. When in a structural drawing two or more bonds are
represented in the drawing as open wedges (e.g., the structure of
Formula 1 the bonds so indicated are in a syn conformation; that is
to say all such bonds go into the plane of the page or all such
bonds come out of the plane of the page.
[0113] In structural drawings, when a chemical bond is represented
as a filled-in blackened wedge, such a representation means that
the bond is coming out of the plane of the page and represents a
specific stereochemistry.
[0114] In structural drawings, when a chemical bond is represented
as a dashed wedge (e.g., the structure of compound 41), such a
representation means that the bond is going into the plane of the
page and represents a specific stereochemistry.
[0115] In structural drawings, when a chemical bond is represented
as a wavy line (e.g., the structure of compound 24), such a
representation means that the bond can assume any stereochemistry
and can be syn, anti, cis, or trans with any of its neighboring
bonds.
[0116] b. Process Details
[0117] In accordance with the present invention, a process has been
discovered for economically preparing a benzylammonium compound
having the structure of Formula 1 wherein the method comprises
treating a benzyl alcohol ether compound having the structure of
Formula 6 under derivatization conditions to form a derivatized
benzyl ether compound having the structure of Formula 2 and
contacting the derivatized benzyl ether compound with an amine
having the structure of Formula 42 under amination conditions
thereby producing the benzylammonium compound or a derivative
thereof, wherein: R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently are selected from the group consisting of H and
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one or
more carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S, and
wherein optionally two or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
taken together with the atom to which they are attached form a
cyclic structure; and X is a nucleophilic substitution leaving
group. The conversion of compound (6) to compound (1) is shown in
Eq. 2. 31
[0118] Groups R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently can vary
widely in their structures and compositions and remain within the
scope of the present invention. In one embodiment, R.sup.3,
R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently can be H or C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl. Preferably, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5
independently can be H or C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl;
more preferably independently C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
hydrocarbyl; still more preferably independently C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl. In a preferred embodiment, R.sup.3, R.sup.4,
and R.sup.5 independently can be methyl, ethyl, or propyl. For
example, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 can each be methyl and the
amine of Formula 42 can be trimethylamine. Alternatively, R.sup.3,
R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 can each be ethyl and the amine of Formula 42
can be triethylamine.
[0119] In another embodiment, the amine of Formula 42 can comprise
a heterocycle as its structure or as one of its substructures. The
amine can have more than one ring and can comprise, for example, a
bicyclic heterocycle. In a preferred embodiment, the amine is
1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) and the benzylammonium
compound has the structure of Formula 3. 32
[0120] Groups R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 can also vary widely in the
method of the present invention. For example, R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
independently can be C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10hydrocarbyl;
preferably R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are independently C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl. In one preferred embodiment R.sup.1 and
R.sup.2 are both butyl.
[0121] The benzylammonium compound 1 can be an essentially racemic
mixture of enantiomers, or one enantiomer can preponderate over
another enantiomer. For example, when R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are both
butyl, compound 1 can be an essentially racemic mixture of
enantiomers or compound 1 can comprise a (4R,5R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (4S,5S) enantiomer.
[0122] In another preferred embodiment one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
is ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl. In such a
case, compound 1 can be an essentially racemic mixture of
enantiomers or compound 1 can comprise a (3R) enantiomer that
preponderates over a (3S) enantiomer. Alternatively, compound 1 can
comprise a (3S) enantiomer that preponderates over a (3R)
enantiomer.
[0123] X in the structure of Formula 1 can vary widely and can
represent essentially any nucleophilic leaving group that produces
either a pharmaceutically acceptable anion or an anion that can be
exchanged for a pharmaceutically acceptable anion. In other words,
X.sup.- is a pharmaceutically acceptable anion or an anion that can
be exchanged for a pharmaceutically acceptable anion. For example,
X can be chloro, bromo, iodo, methanesulfonato, toluenesulfonato,
and trifluoromethanesulfonato. Preferably X is chloro, bromo, or
iodo and more preferably X is chloro.
[0124] Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are particularly useful as
products of the methods of the present invention because of their
greater aqueous solubility relative to a corresponding parent or
neutral compound. Such salts must have a pharmaceutically
acceptable anion or cation. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable
acid addition salts of the compounds of the present invention when
possible include those derived from inorganic acids, such as
hydrochloric, hydrobrornic, hydrofluoric, boric, fluoroboric,
phosphoric, metaphosphoric, nitric, carbonic (including carbonate
and hydrogen carbonate anions), sulfonic, and sulfuric acids, and
organic acids such as acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, citric,
ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glycolic, isothionic, lactic,
lactobionic, maleic, malic, methanesulfonic,
trifluoromethanesulfonic, succinic, toluenesulfonic, tartaric, and
trifluoroacetic acids. The chloride salt is particularly preferred
for medical purposes. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable base
salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium and
potassium salts, and alkaline earth salts such as magnesium and
calcium salts.
[0125] When compound I is formed, it can be used as it is prepared
or it can be further processed. For example, anion X.sup.- can be
exchanged, for example by an ion exchange method such as ion
exchange chromatography, for any pharmaceutically acceptable
anion.
[0126] The amination conditions under which compound 2 and compound
42 react to form benzylammonium compound 1 are robust and can vary
widely. For example, the amination can be performed neat without a
solvent, or the amination conditions can comprise a solvent. When a
solvent is employed, that solvent can have hydrophilic or
hydrophobic properties or it can have both hydrophilic and
hydrophobic properties. When the solvent comprises a hydrophilic
solvent, the hydrophilic solvent can comprise, for example, water;
a nitrile such as acetonitrile; an ether such as tetrahydrofuran,
diethyl ether, or methyl t-butyl ether; an alcohol such as
methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, or butanol; a ketone such as
acetone or methyl ethyl ketone; or an ester such as ethyl acetate.
When the solvent comprises a hydrophobic solvent, the hydrophobic
solvent can comprise, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent
such as a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 aliphatic hydrocarbon; an
aromatic solvent such as benzene, toluene, xylene, or mesitylene;
or a halogenated solvent such as methylene chloride, chloroform,
carbon tetrachloride, trifluoromethylbenzene, or chlorobenzene.
Alternatively, the solvent can comprise a blend of hydrophilic and
hydrophobic solvents. In one preferred embodiment the solvent
comprises a blend of methyl ethyl ketone and water. In a further
preferred embodiment the solvent comprises a blend of methyl ethyl
ketone, toluene, and water. Essentially any solvent that is less
nucleophilic than compound 42 can be used as a solvent in the
amination reaction. Preferably the amination is performed under
conditions in which the reagents and product are substantially in
homogeneous solution during the majority of the reaction.
[0127] The amination can proceed over a wide range of temperatures
and preferably is performed within the range of about 0.degree. C.
to about 120.degree. C., more preferably about 15.degree. C. to
about 110.degree. C., still more preferably about 30.degree. C. to
about 100.degree. C., and more preferably still about 45.degree. C.
to about 90.degree. C. The amination conveniently can be performed
in refluxing solvent such as refluxing methyl ethyl ketone.
Preferably, the refluxing in methyl ethyl ketone is performed at
ambient pressure.
[0128] The derivatization conditions under which benzyl alcohol
ether compound 6 is reacted to form a derivatized benzyl ether
compound of Formula 2 can comprise essentially any conditions known
in the art for converting a benzyl alcohol group into a group that
is labile under nucleophilic substitution conditions such as
anination conditions. For example, the derivatization conditions
can comprise contacting compound 6 with a halogenating agent.
Useful halogenating agents include a thionyl halide, a sulfuryl
halide, a phosphorus trihalide, a phosphorus pentahalide, an oxalyl
halide, and a hydrogen halide. A halogenating agent useful in the
present process is preferably a chlorinating agent or a brominating
agent, and more preferably a chlorinating agent. For example, the
halogenating agent can be thionyl chloride, phosphorus trichloride,
phosphorus pentachloride, or hydrogen chloride; preferably the
halogenating agent is selected among thionyl chloride, phosphorus
trichloride, and phosphorus pentachloride. More preferably the
halogenating agent is thionyl chloride. Alternatively, the
halogenating agent can comprise a mixture of a phosphine such as
triphenylphosphine and a carbon tetrahalide such as carbon
tetrachloride. The halogenating agent can be added to the reaction
mixture in any form. For example the halogenating agent can be
added as a solid or as a liquid (for example as a liquid above the
melting point of the halogenating agent or as a solution in a
solvent) or the halogenating agent can be contacted with the
reaction mixture as a gas under ambient, subambient, or elevated
pressure.
[0129] When the halogenating agent is thionyl chloride, the
halogenation reaction can be performed under a wide variety of
conditions. The reaction can be run neat or it can be run in the
presence of a solvent. A particularly useful solvent is an aprotic
solvent. For example, the solvent can comprise an aromatic solvent,
a chlorinated solvent, an ether, an amide, an ester, or a
hydrocarbon. Preferred solvents include methylene chloride,
chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, chlorobenzene,
trifluoromethylbenzene, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, ethyl
acetate, and N,N-dimethylacetamide. When the halogenating agent is
thionyl chloride, the reaction can be performed at essentially any
convenient temperature. Preferably the reaction can run at a
temperature of about 0.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C., more
preferably about 10.degree. C. to about 125.degree. C., more
preferably still about 15.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C., still
more preferably about 20.degree. C. to about 75.degree. C., and
more preferably yet about 20.degree. C. to about 50.degree. C.
[0130] Alternatively, the derivatization conditions under which
compound 6 is reacted to form compound 2 can comprise sulfonating
the hydroxy group of compound 6 with a sulfonation reagent to form
a sulfonated compound, and then treating the sulfonated compound
with a source of halide such as a hydrogen halide or a halide salt
to form compound 2.
[0131] In another embodiment, the derivatization conditions can
comprise conditions under which the benzyl hydroxyl group is
converted into an oxygen leaving group, for example
methanesulfonato, toluenesulfonato, benzenesulfonato, or
trifluoromethanesulfonato. Benzyl alcohol ether compound 6 can for
example be treated with a sulfonation reagent such as an alkyl
sulfonyl halide reagent or an aryl sulfonyl halide reagent. Such
alkyl or aryl sulfonyl halide reagents can include a
methanesulfonyl halide, a toluenesulfonyl halide, a benzenesulfonyl
halide, or a trifluoromethanesulfonyl halide. Preferably the
reagent is an alkyl sulfonyl chloride reagent, an aryl sulfonyl
chloride reagent, an alkyl sulfonyl bromide reagent, or an aryl
sulfonyl bromide reagent. More preferably the sulfonyl halide
reagent is a sulfonyl chloride reagent such as methanesulfonyl
chloride, toluenesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, or
trifluoromethanesulfonyl chloride.
[0132] In the process of the present invention, the benzyl alcohol
ether compound 6 can be used as an essentially racemic mixture of
enantiomers or one enantiomer can preponderate over another
enantiomer. For example, compound 6 can have a predominantly
(4R,5R) absolute configuration or it can have a predominantly
(4S,5S) absolute configuration. Alternatively, compound 6 can
comprise a blend of (4R,5R) and (4S,5S) absolute
configurations.
[0133] The preparative method of the present invention can further
comprise a step wherein a phenol compound having the structure of
Formula 4 is contacted with a substituted xylene compound having
the structure of Formula 5 under substitution conditions to produce
a benzyl alcohol ether compound having the structure of Formula 6
wherein X.sup.2 is a leaving group. Phenol compound 4 can comprise
an essentially racemic mixture or it can comprise predominantly an
absolute configuration of (4R,5R). Alternatively, compound 4 can
comprise predominantly an absolute configuration of (4S,5S). The
conversion of compound 4 into compound 6 is shown in Eq. 3. 33
[0134] X.sup.2 can be essentially any leaving group known in the
art for nucleophilic substitution at benzylic carbon. For example,
X.sup.2 can be halo or a sulfonato group such as methanesulfonato,
toluenesulfonato, benzenesulfonato, or trifluoromethanesulfonato.
Preferably X.sup.2 is halo and more preferably it is chloro, bromo,
or iodo. More preferably still X.sup.2 is chloro.
[0135] The conversion of compound 4 into compound 6 can be
performed, if desired, in the presence of a solvent. Essentially
any solvent that dissolves to some extent the reactants and that is
primarily non-reactive toward the reactants will be useful. For
example, the solvent can comprise an aromatic solvent, an amide, an
ester, a ketone, an ether or a sulfoxide. Preferably, the solvent
is an aprotic solvent such as N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethyl
sulfoxide, tetrahydrofuran, or an amide solvent. Preferably the
solvent is an amide solvent. More preferably the amide is selected
from the group consisting of dimethylformamide and
dimethylacetamide; and still more preferably the solvent is
N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC).
[0136] The conversion of compound 4 into compound 6 can further be
performed in the presence of a base. Useful bases include a metal
hydroxide, a metal alcoholate, a metal hydride, an alkyl metal
complex, a metal carbonate, and an amide base. Preferably the base
comprises a metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide, potassium
hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, or calcium hydroxide. More preferably
the base is sodium hydroxide. When the base is a metal carbonate,
preferably it is an alkali metal carbonate or an alkaline earth
metal carbonate. For example the base can be potassium
carbonate.
[0137] The preparative method of the present invention can further
comprise a deprotecting step wherein a protected phenol compound
having the structure of Formula 7 34
[0138] is deprotected to form the phenol compound 4, wherein
R.sup.6 is a protecting group. The conversion of compound 7 into
compound 4 is shown in Eq. 4. A protecting group is any chemical
group that temporarily blocks a reactive site in a molecule while a
chemical reaction is selectively performed at another reactive site
in the same molecule or at a reactive site in another molecule
residing in the same reaction mixture as the protected molecule.
Many protecting groups described by Greene and Wuts (Protective
Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3d ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, 1999, pp. 249-287, herein incorporated by reference) are
useful for protecting the phenol functional group in the process of
the present invention. For example, R.sup.6 can be a hydrocarbyl
group such as a methyl group, an isopropyl group, a t-butyl group,
a cyclohexyl group, or a benzyl group; an alkoxymethyl group such
as a methoxymethyl group or a benzyloxymethyl group; an
alkylthiomethyl group such as a methylthiomethyl group; a silyl
group such as a trimethylsilyl group; an acyl group such as a
formyl group, an acetyl group, or a benzoyl group; a carbonate
group such as a methyl carbonate group; a phosphinate group; or a
sulfonate group. In one embodiment, R.sup.6 is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 hydrocarbyl group, preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
alkyl group, more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkyl
group, and still more preferably methyl.
[0139] When R.sup.6 is a methyl group, a wide variety of conditions
can be used in the deprotecting step. For example the conditions of
the deprotecting step can comprise treating compound 7 with a
deprotecting reagent. Without limitation, useful deprotecting
reagents include a halotrimethylsilane such as iodotrimethylsilane;
an alkali metal such as lithium or sodium in combination with
18-crown-6; an alkali metal sulfide such as sodium sulfide or
lithium sulfide; an alkali metal halide such as lithium iodide; an
aluminum trihalide such as aluminum tribromide; an aluminum
trihalide and an alkylthiol such as ethanethiol; a strong acid in
combination with a source of nucleophilic sulfur; a boron trihalide
such as boron tribromide or boron trichloride; a hydrogen halide
such as hydrogen iodide, hydrogen bromide, or hydrogen iodide; or a
metal hydrocarbyl thiolate. When the deprotecting reagent comprises
a boron trihaiide, preferably it comprises boron tribromide. When
the deprotecting reagent is a metal hydrocarbyl thiolate,
preferably it is a lithium hydrocarbyl thiolate, more preferably a
lithium C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl thiolate, and more
preferably still lithium ethanethiolate. When the deprotecting
reagent is a strong acid in combination with a source of
nucleophilic sulfur, preferably the strong acid can for example be
sulfuric acid, a sulfonic acid, a Lewis acid, or a phosphorus oxy
acid. Preferably the strong acid is sulfuric acid or a sulfonic
acid, and more preferably a sulfonic acid. When the strong acid is
a sulfonic acid, preferably it is methanesulfonic acid,
trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, or
toluenesulfonic acid; more preferably the strong acid is
methanesulfonic acid. The source of nucleophilic sulfur can, for
example, be methionine.
[0140] In the method of the present invention, compound 7 can be a
racemic compound or it can be used as a mixture of stereoisomers or
it can be used as predominantly one of its stereoisomers.
Preferably compound 7 has an absolute configuration of (4R,5R).
Alternatively, compound 7 can have an absolute configuration of
(4S,5S).
[0141] When the deprotecting reagent is a sulfonic acid in
combination with methionine, a variety of conditions can be
employed in the deprotecting step of the present method. The
reaction can be run substantially neat (substantially without added
solvent), or a solvent can be added. Essentially any solvent that
dissolves the reagents and that is mostly unreactive toward the
reagents would be useful in this reaction. Useful solvents include
a hydrocarbon solvent such as an alkane, an aromatic solvent such
as benzene or toluene; a chlorinated solvent such as methylene
chloride, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, chlorobenzene, or
trifluoromethylbenzene; and inorganic solvents such as
SO.sub.2.
[0142] The deprotecting step can be performed over a wide range of
temperatures. Preferably the temperature is in the range of about
0.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C., more preferably about
25.degree. C. to about 130.degree. C., still more preferably about
50.degree. C. to about 110.degree. C., and more preferably still
about 65.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C.
[0143] In another embodiment, the method of the present invention
can further comprise a cyclization step wherein an amino sulfur
oxide aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula 8a is
treated under cyclization conditions to form a protected phenol
compound having the structure of Formula 7a wherein R.sup.1,
R.sup.2, and R.sup.6 are defined above, and y is 1 or 2. The
cyclization of 8a into 7a is shown in Eq. 5. 35
[0144] The cyclization can be mediated by conditions that comprise
treating the amino sulfur oxide aldehyde with a base. Useful bases
in this reaction include MOR.sup.11, a metal hydroxide, or an alkyl
metal complex, wherein R.sup.11 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
hydrocarbyl group and M is an alkali metal. Preferably the base is
MOR.sup.11. When the base is MOR.sup.11, M is preferably lithium or
potassium. In a particularly useful embodiment R.sup.11 is a
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl group, preferably a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.5 alkyl group, more preferably R.sup.11 is methyl,
ethyl, isopropyl, or tert-butyl, and still more preferably R.sup.11
is tert-butyl.
[0145] The conditions of the cyclization step can comprise a
solvent. The solvent can be a hydrophilic solvent and preferably it
is a hydrophilic aprotic solvent. The solvent can be, for example,
a cyclic or acyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether,
methyl tert-butyl ether, 1,4-dioxane, glyme, or diglyme. Preferably
the solvent is tetrahydrofuran. Alternatively, the solvent can be
an alcohol such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl alcohol,
butanol, sec-butyl alcohol, isobutyl alcohol, or t-butyl
alcohol.
[0146] The cyclization step can be performed at various
temperatures. Preferably the step is performed at a temperature of
about -20.degree. C. to about 50.degree. C., preferably about
-10.degree. C. to about 35.degree. C., and more preferably about
0.degree. C. to about 25.degree. C.
[0147] When y is 1, the present method can further comprise an
oxidation step to convert the amino sulfoxide aldehyde (8a where
y=1) to the amino sulfone aldehyde (8a where y=2). For example, the
oxidation step can comprise treating the amino sulfoxide aldehyde
with sodium hypochlorite. Alternatively, the amino sulfoxide
aldehyde can be treated with hydrogen peroxide, preferably in the
presence of imidazole and tetraphenylporphyrin Fe(III) chloride. In
another alternative, the amino sulfoxide aldehyde can be treated
with hydrogen peroxide in the presence of methyltrioxorhenium. The
conversion of the amino sulfoxide aldehyde to the sulfone will also
be achieved by treating the sulfoxide with hydrogen peroxide in the
presence of acetonitrile and a base such as potassium carbonate.
Another useful oxidation will comprise treating the amino sulfoxide
aldehyde with cobalt diacetonylacetonate (Co(acac).sub.2) in the
presence of O.sub.2 and, for example, isovaleraldehyde. Still
another useful oxidation will comprise treating the amino sulfoxide
aldehyde with 2-methylpropanal in the presence of O.sub.2.
Alternatively, the oxidation will be performed by treating the
amino sulfoxide aldehyde with silica gel in the presence of t-butyl
hydroperoxide. The conversion will also occur when the amino
sulfoxide aldehyde is treated with periodic acid in the presence,
for example, of ruthenium trichloride hydrate. Alternate conditions
for the oxidation can comprise treating the amino sulfoxide
aldehyde with urea and phthalic anhydride in the presence of
hydrogen peroxide. In another example the oxidation of the amino
sulfoxide aldehyde will be carried out by treatment with Oxone
monopersulfate compound (2 KHSO.sub.5. KHSO.sub.4. K.sub.2SO.sub.4)
in the presence of silica gel or wet montmorillonite clay.
[0148] Preferably y is 2 during the cyclization step.
[0149] In still another embodiment, the method of the present
invention can further comprise an reductive alkylation step in
which a nitro sulfur oxide aldehyde compound having the structure
of Formula 9a is reductively alkylated to form the amino sulfur
oxide aldehyde compound 8b wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and R.sup.6
are defined above, and z is 0, 1, or 2. Preferably z is 2. The
conditions under which compound 9a is reductively alkylated can
include, for example, contacting 9a with a source of formaldehyde
and a source of H.sub.2 in the presence of a catalyst. The
reductive alkylation is preferably performed at elevated H.sub.2
pressure. It is useful to perform the reductive alkylation at
H.sub.2 pressures ranging from about 100 to about 700,000 kPa,
preferably from about 200 to about 300,000 kPa, more preferably
from about 300 to about 100,000 kPa, still more preferably from
about 350 to about 10,000 kPa, and more preferably still from about
400 to about 1000 kPa. The conversion of compound 9a into compound
8b is shown in Eq. 6. 36
[0150] The reductive alkylation described herein can, if preferred,
be performed on an acetal derivative of compound 9a as shown in Eq.
8b.
[0151] The source of formaldehyde can be essentially any source
that produces the equivalent of CH.sub.2O. For example, the source
of formaldehyde can be formalin, dimethoxymethane,
paraformaldehyde, trioxane, or any polymer of CH.sub.2O.
Conveniently the source of formaldehyde can be formalin, and
preferably about 30% to about 37% formalin.
[0152] The catalyst for the reductive alkylation can be either a
heterogeneous catalyst or a homogeneous catalyst. Preferably the
catalyst is a metal, for example be a noble metal catalyst. Useful
noble metal catalysts include Pt, Pd, Ru, and Rh. Preferably the
noble metal catalyst is a Pd catalyst. Alternatively, the metal
catalyst can be a nickel catalyst, for example a high-surface area
nickel catalyst such as Raney nickel. The catalyst can be a
homogeneous catalyst or it can be a heterogeneous catalyst,
preferably a heterogeneous catalyst. When the catalyst is a noble
metal catalyst, it can be used either as the metal per se or the
metal can be used in combination with a solid support such as
carbon. Alternatively, the metal catalyst can be used in
combination with another metal such as an anchor metal or a
promoter metal. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the
catalyst comprises Pd on carbon.
[0153] An acid can be present in the reaction mixture during the
reductive alkylation. Preferably the acid is a strong acid and more
preferably a strong mineral acid. For example, the acid can be
sulfuric acid.
[0154] The reaction mixture can conveniently comprise a solvent
during the reductive alkylation. Useful solvents include an
alcohol, an aromatic solvent, an ether solvent, and a halogenated
solvent such as a halogenated aromatic solvent. Preferably the
solvent is an alcohol solvent such as ethanol.
[0155] The reductive alkylation reaction can be run at any
convenient temperature, for example from about 0.degree. C. to
about 200.degree. C., preferably from about 10C to about
150.degree. C., more preferably from about 15.degree. C. to about
125.degree. C., still more preferably from about 20.degree. C. to
about 100.degree. C., more preferably still from about 25.degree.
C. to about 80.degree. C., and more preferably yet from about
30.degree. C. to about 75.degree. C.
[0156] The reductive alkylation can alternatively be performed in
two steps. For example, in a first step the nitro group of compound
9a can be reduced to an amino group and then the amino group can be
methylated. For example, nitro sulfur oxide aldehyde compound 9a
can be reduced to form an aniline sulfur oxide compound having the
structure of Formula 39 37
[0157] wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.6 and z are as defined
above. The method can further comprise a methylation step in which
the aniline sulfur oxide compound is treated under methylation
conditions to form the amino sulfur oxide aldehyde compound 8a. The
reduction of the nitro group to an amino group can be achieved, for
example, by catalytic hydrogenation. The catalytic hydrogenation to
form compound 39 will be achieved, for example by contacting
compound 9a with H.sub.2 in the presence of a hydrogenation
catalyst. A useful hydrogenation catalyst will be, for example, a
palladium catalyst such as palladium on carbon (Pd/C). It will be
useful to perform the hydrogenation at H.sub.2 pressures ranging
from about 100 to about 700,000 kPa, preferably from about 200 to
about 300,000 kPa, more preferably from about 300 to about 100,000
kPa, still more preferably from about 350 to about 10,000 kPa, and
more preferably still from about 400 to about 1000 kPa. The
methylation step can be carried out under a wide variety of
methylation conditions. Alternatively, the reduction of 9a to form
39 can be performed under other reduction conditions such as
treatment of 9a with iron in the presence of acetic acid or
treatment of 9a with tin in the presence of hydrochloric acid.
[0158] The methylation conditions can comprise, for example,
treating compound 39 with a methylating reagent such as a methyl
halide or a methyl sulfonate. Useful methyl halides include methyl
chloride, methyl bromide, and methyl iodide. Useful methyl
sulfonates include methyl methanesulfonate, methyl
toluenesulfonate, methyl benzenesulfonate, and methyl
trifluoromethylsulfonate. Alternatively, the methylation conditions
can comprise treating compound 39 with a source of formaldehyde in
the presence of H.sub.2 and a hydrogenation catalyst. Conditions
useful for the reductive alkylation of compound 9a to compound 8b
are also useful for the methylation of compound 39.
[0159] In another embodiment, the method of the present invention
can further comprise an oxidation step in which a nitro sulfide
aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula 10 is oxidized to
form compound 9a wherein R.sup.6 is a protecting group and z is 1
or 2. Preferably, compound 10 is treated under oxidation conditions
to form a nitro sulfone aldehyde compound of Formula 9. The
oxidation reaction can be carried out by treating 10 with an
oxidizing agent. Useful oxidizing agents include, for example, a
peracid, an alkyl hydroperoxide, or hydrogen peroxide. When the
oxidizing agent is a peracid, it can conveniently be, for example,
peracetic acid or m-chloroperbenzoic acid. Preferably the oxidizing
agent comprises peracetic acid. The conversion of compound 10 to
compound 9a is shown in Eq. 7. 38
[0160] The method of the present invention can also further
comprise a step in which compound 9a where z is 1 is oxidized to
sulfone compound 9. Such an oxidation can be performed by treating
9a where z is 1 with for example, a peracid, an alkyl
hydroperoxide, or hydrogen peroxide.
[0161] During the oxidation step of Eq. 8 it is convenient to
protect the aldehyde functional group of compound 10 from
oxidation, for example to prevent the formation of the
corresponding carboxylic acid. A variety of protecting groups are
known in the art for protecting aldehydes from being oxidized to
carboxylic acids and such protecting groups can be employed in the
method of the present invention. Numerous methods of protecting
aldehydes are described by Greene and Wuts (Protective Groups in
Organic Synthesis, 3d ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
1999, pp. 297-368, herein incorporated by reference) are useful
herein. For example, the aldehyde group of compound 10 can be
protected as an acetal such as a dimethyl acetal or a diethyl
acetal. Essentially any of the acetal-forming methods described by
Greene and Wuts are useful in the present invention. It is
convenient to protect the aldehyde group of 10 as a dimethyl acetal
by contacting 10 with trimethyl orthoformate, an acid such as
p-toluenesulfonic acid, and methanol. Conveniently, 10 can be
contacted with trimethyl orthoformate, the acid, and methanol in
the presence of a solvent. A useful solvent is benzotrifluoride
(BTF). After the oxidation step, the aldehyde group can be
deprotected by methods known in the art. For example, the dimethyl
acetal can be converted to the aldehyde by treatment with water and
an acid such as sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid.
[0162] Alternatively, the method of the present invention can
comprise an oxidation step in which the conditions comprise
enantioselective oxidation conditions. Such enantioselective
oxidation conditions are described in PCT Patent Application No. WO
99/32478, herein incorporated by reference. For example, nitro
sulfide aldehyde compound 10 can be enantioselectively oxidized to
a chiral nitro sulfoxide aldehyde compound (9a where z is 1). Ring
closure of the chiral nitro sulfoxide aldehyde compound by
treatment with base (for example a metal alkoxide such as potassium
t-butoxide) will form selectively one enantiomer or set of
diastereomers of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1-oxide compound that
can be further oxidized selectively to predominantly one enantiomer
or selectively to a set of diastereomers of the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine-1,1-- dioxide.
[0163] The method of the present invention can further comprise a
sulfide-forming step in which a substituted diphenyl methane
compound having the structure of Formula 11 is coupled with a
substituted propionaldehyde equivalent compound having the
structure of Formula 12a in the presence of a source of sulfur to
form the nitro sulfide aldehyde compound 10 wherein R.sup.1,
R.sup.2, and R.sup.6 are defined above; R.sup.27 is an aldehyde
group (--CHO) or a protected aldehyde group such as an acetal;
X.sup.3 is an aromatic substitution leaving group; and X.sup.4 is a
nucleophilic substitution leaving group. This overall
sulfide-forming step is shown in Eq. 8. 39
[0164] Where R.sup.27 is an aldehyde group, compound 12a has the
structure of Formula 12. 40
[0165] In the reaction of Eq. 8, it is also possible for R.sup.27
to be --CH.sub.2OH (or a protected alcohol) or --CO.sub.2H (or a
protected carboxylic acid). Where R.sup.27 is --CH.sub.2OH (or a
protected alcohol), the addition of compound 12a can conveniently
be followed by an oxidation step in which the alcohol function is
oxidized to an aldehyde or carboxylic acid function. Where R.sup.27
is --CO.sub.2H (or a protected carboxylic acid), the addition of
compound 12a can conveniently be followed by a reduction step.
Alternatively, where R.sup.27 is --CO.sub.2H (or a protected
carboxylic acid), the addition of compound 12a can be followed by a
cyclization step and/or a sulfur oxidation step to form a cyclic
ketone that can be reduced to alcohol 7a.
[0166] The source of sulfur can be, for example, a metal sulfide
such as lithium sulfide (Li.sub.2S), sodium sulfide (Na.sub.2S), or
Na.sub.2S.sub.2. Preferably the source of sulfur is Na.sub.2S or
Li.sub.2S, and more preferably Na.sub.2S. X.sup.3 can be
essentially any convenient aromatic substitution leaving group. For
example, X.sup.3 can be a halogen, a sulfonato group, or a nitro
group. Preferably X.sup.3 is a halogen, more preferably Cl or Br,
and still more preferably Cl. When X.sup.3 is a sulfonato group, it
can be, for example, methanesulfonato, trifluoromethanesulfonato,
benzenesulfonato, or toluenesulfonato; preferably X.sup.3 is
trifluoromethane-sulfonato. When X.sup.3 is a sulfonato group, the
sulfide-forming reaction is preferably carried out in the presence
of a noble metal such as Pd(0) and a metal sulfide.
[0167] X.sup.4 can be essentially any nucleophilic substitution
leaving group that, when displaced, produces an anion that is
chemically and physically compatible with the reaction conditions.
For example, X.sup.4 can be chloro, bromo, iodo, methanesulfonato,
toluenesulfonato, and trifluoromethanesulfonato. Preferably X.sup.4
is chloro, bromo, or iodo and more preferably X.sup.4 is bromo.
[0168] In the sulfide-forming step of the present reaction, it is
preferred that diphenylmethane compound 11 be contacted with the
source of sulfur to form the intermediate thiolate anion 44 before
being contacted with the substituted propionaldehyde compound 12.
41
[0169] In the sulfide-forming step of the present inventive method,
the contacting of the source of sulfur with compound 11 can be done
at any convenient temperature. Preferably the contacting is
performed at a temperature in the range of about 0.degree. C. to
about 150.degree. C., more preferably about 0.degree. C. to about
100.degree. C., still more preferably about 10.degree. C. to about
75.degree. C., still more preferably about 20.degree. C. to about
50.degree. C., and more preferably yet around 25.degree. C. to
about 45.degree. C. It is helpful to allow the source of sulfur,
for example sodium sulfide, to contact compound 11 for a period of
reaction time before adding substituted propionaldehyde compound 12
to the mixture. Appropriately, the reaction time can be about 5
minutes to about ten hours, preferably about 10 minutes to about 7
hours, more preferably about 20 minutes to about 5 hours, and more
preferably still about 30 minutes to about 3 hours.
[0170] Optionally, anion 44 can be quenched, for example with water
or with an acid, to form thiol compound 45. Thiol 45 can be
isolated, stored, transported, or kept in a solution until used.
When ready to use thiol 45 to prepare compound 10, thiol 45 can be
treated with a suitable base such as a metal alkoxide, a metal
hydride, an alkyl metal complex, or other base to form anion 44.
Suitable bases include, for example, an alkali metal alkoxide such
as sodium methoxide, lithium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, lithium
ethoxide, and potassium t-butoxide. Useful metal hydrides include
sodium hydride and calcium hydride.
[0171] However, it is preferred not to quench anion 44 or to
isolate thiol compound 45. Anion 44 is sufficiently stable to store
or transport without quenching. Alternatively, the addition of the
source of sulfur and the reaction with the substituted
propionaldehyde compound 12 can be performed in one reaction vessel
or in one reaction mixture without isolation of intermediate
structures.
[0172] Alternatively, the sulfide-forming step can be performed
following the reaction of Eq. 8a, wherein diphenylmethane compound
11 is contacted under coupling conditions described above with a
thiopropyl compound 12b to form sulfide 10a. In Eq. 8a, R.sup.1,
R.sup.2, R.sup.6, R.sup.27, and X.sup.3 are as defined above and
R.sup.28 is H or a labile thiol protecting group such as an acyl
group, preferably an acetyl group. 42
[0173] The reaction of Eq. 8a can conveniently be performed in the
presence of a base. Useful bases include an alkali metal base or an
alkaline earth metal base. Useful alkali metal bases include alkali
metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide.
Conveniently, the reaction of Eq. 8a can be performed in the
presence of a solvent, preferably an aprotic solvent, and more
preferably a polar aprotic solvent. A preferred solvent for the
reaction of Eq. 8a is DMSO.
[0174] Conveniently, the sulfide-forming step of Eq. 8a can be
performed in the presence of a solvent. Useful solvents include
polar aprotic solvents. Without limitation, useful polar aprotic
solvents include N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC), dimethylsulfoxide
(DMSO), dimethylformamide (DMF), and N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP).
Preferably the solvent is DMAC.
[0175] Where R.sup.27 of Eq. 8a is a protected aldehyde group such
as an acetal group, compound 10a can be further reacted to
deprotect the protected acetal group, if desired. Alternatively,
compound 10a can be directly oxidized under sulfide oxidizing
conditions described herein to form sulfone compound 10c. If
desired, compound 10c can be treated under reductive alkylation
conditions described herein to form a dimethylamino aldehyde
compound 10b as shown in Eq. 8b. 43
[0176] FIG. 1 shows an overall process by which substituted
propionaldehyde compound 12 can be prepared. Compound 12 can be
made, for example, by reacting a diol compound having the structure
of Formula 37 in the presence of a carbonyl compound having the
structure of Formula 38 and a source of X.sup.4 to form an acid
ester having the structure of Formula 36. X.sup.6 can be hydroxy,
halo, or --OC(O)R.sup.18; preferably hydroxy or halo. When X.sup.6
is halo, preferably it is chloro, bromo, or iodo; more preferably
chloro. Alternatively X.sup.6 can be hydroxy. When X.sup.6 is
hydroxy, the reaction of compound 37 with the carbonyl compound 38
is advantageously performed in the presence of a strong acid,
preferably a strong mineral acid. Useful strong acids include HCl,
HBr, HI, sulfuric acid, or a sulfonic acid. Useful sulfonic acids
include methanesulfonic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid,
p-toluenesulfonic acid, and benzenesulfonic acid. Preferably the
strong acid is HBr. R.sup.10 and R.sup.18 independently can be
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl; preferably C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alkyl; more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkyl;
more preferably still methyl, ethyl, or isopropyl; and still more
preferably methyl. R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and X.sup.4, are as defined
above. The source of X.sup.4 can be, for example, a source of
halide. The source of halide can be any source in which the halide
can nucleophilically displace an acyloxy group such as
--OC(O)R.sup.10. For example, the source of halide can
advantageously be the strong acid when the strong acid is HCl, HBr,
or HI. Preferably the source of halide is a source of bromide such
as NaBr, LiBr, or HBr. When the source of bromide is NaBr or LiBr,
it is advantageous to perform the reaction in the presence of an
acid catalyst. Preferably the source of halide is HBr or HI, more
preferably HBr. Advantageously, the reaction to form compound 36
can be performed over a wide range of temperatures. Preferably the
reaction is performed from about 50.degree. C. to about 175.degree.
C., more preferably about 65.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C.,
still more preferably about 70.degree. C. to about 130.degree. C.
44
[0177] Acid ester 36 can be solvolyzed to form a substituted
propanol compound having the structure of Formula 35. The
solvolysis reaction can be performed under conditions known in the
art for the solvolysis of carboxylic acid esters without displacing
X.sup.4. It is convenient to perform the solvolysis in the presence
of an acid catalyst. A useful acid catalyst can be a mineral acid
or an organic acid. When the acid catalyst is a mineral acid, it
can be for example a hydrogen halide acid, sulfuric acid, or a
sulfonic acid. Useful sulfonic acids include methanesulfonic acid,
toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and
trifluoromethanesulfonic acid. Useful hydrogen halide acids include
hydrochloric acid, hydrobronic acid, and hydroiodic acid;
preferably hydrobromic acid. The solvolysis can be performed in the
presence of a solvent. Preferably the solvent is a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10 alcohol solvent; more preferably a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alcohol solvent; still more preferably methanol, ethanol,
propanol, or 2-propanol; and more preferably still ethanol.
[0178] The reactions to form compounds 36 and 35 can be performed
separately with individual isolation of the products.
Alternatively, the reactions can be performed in a single reaction
vessel or in a single reaction medium without isolation of compound
36.
[0179] The substituted propanol compound 35 can be oxidized to form
the substituted propionaldehyde compound 12. This can be achieved
by contacting compound 35 with an oxidizing agent. Oxidation
conditions should be appropriate to those in which an alcohol group
is oxidized in the presence of X.sup.4. For example, the oxidizing
conditions can comprise a mild oxidizing agent such as sulfur
trioxide-pyridine complex. Other useful oxidizing conditions
include, for example, contacting 35 with oxalyl chloride and
triethylamine in the presence of a reactant such as DMSO. Another
example of useful oxidizing conditions comprise contacting 35 with
sodium hypochlorite in the presence of
2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy free radical (TEMPO). When the
oxidizing agent is sulfur trioxide-pyridine complex, the oxidation
can advantageously be performed at a temperature from about
10.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C.; preferably about 20.degree.
C. to about 75.degree. C.; more preferably about 20.degree. C. to
about 50.degree. C. The oxidation can be performed in the presence
of a solvent. Useful solvents include for example a sulfoxide such
as DMSO; or a chlorinated solvent such as methylene chloride,
chloroform, or carbon tetrachloride. When the oxidizing agent is
sulfur trioxide-pyridine complex, the complex can be added to the
reaction mixture either as a slurry in a solvent or, preferably, as
a solid added over a period of time (for example about 1 to about
15 hours).
[0180] In one preferred embodiment of the preparation of compound
12, both R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are butyl. In an alternative preferred
embodiment, one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is ethyl and the other of
R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl. When one of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is
ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is butyl, compound 12
can have an R absolute configuration about the quaternary carbon
atom. Alternatively, compound 12 can have an S absolute
configuration about the quaternary carbon atom.
[0181] The reactions described herein that are useful for the
preparation of compound 12 can be performed individually or in
combination. FIG. 2 shows a preferred process by which
2,2-dibutyl-3-bromopropionaldehyde can be prepared using the
methods of the present invention.
[0182] One embodiment of the present invention is shown in Eq. 8c
wherein compound 12b can have the structure of compound 12d. Eq. 8c
is exemplary of a large variety of methods by which thioacyl acetal
compounds useful in the present invention can be made in which the
acyl group and the acetal group can independently vary widely in
structure. In Eq. 8c bromoaldehyde compound 53 is treated with
potassium thioacetate to form thioacetyl aldehyde compound 12c.
Compound 12c is treated with a trialkyl formate such as
triethylformate in the presence of an acid catalyst such as a
sulfonic acid catalyst (preferably toluenesulfonic acid) to form
compound 12d, wherein Et is ethyl. The acetal-forming step can be
performed, if desired, in the presence of a solvent, for example an
alcohol solvent. When the acetal formed is an ethyl acetal, the
solvent can conveniently be ethanol. 45
[0183] FIG. 1 a shows a representative overall process by which
nitro sulfide acetal compound 67 (10a wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
are both butyl and R.sup.27 is a diethylacetal group) can be
prepared and by which compound 67 can be used to produce compound
29.
[0184] Compound 12b can, if desired, be prepared by a number of
other methods. For example, acrolein compound 77 can be contacted
with thioacyl compound 78 to form acylthiomethyl aldehyde compound
79 as shown in Eq. 8d. In Eq. 8d, R.sup.29 can be C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
hydrocarbyl, more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 hydrocarbyl,
and still more preferably ethyl or butyl. R.sup.30 can be C.sub.1
to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl, preferably C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10hydrocarbyl, more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5
hydrocarbyl, and still more preferably methyl. Preferably the
reaction of Eq. 8d is performed in the presence of a base catalyst
such as an amine catalyst. For example the amine catalyst can be an
alkylamine such as trialkylamine. 46
[0185] Compound 79 can be contacted with compound 20 to form
acylthiomethyl alkene aldehyde compound 80 as shown in Eq. 8e. The
reaction in Eq. 8e is preferably performed in the presence of an
acid catalyst, preferably a sulfur acid catalyst such as sulfuric
acid or a sulfonic acid. For example the acid catalyst can be
p-toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid,
or trifluoromethanesulfonic acid. The reaction can conveniently be
carried out under heating conditions, for example at a temperature
of about 50.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C., preferably about
75.degree. C. to about 125.degree. C., more preferably about
100.degree. C. to about 115.degree. C. 47
[0186] Compound 80 can be derivatized under acetal-forming
conditions to form unsaturated acetal compound 81. In compound 81,
R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 independently can be C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 alkoxy or, together with the carbon atom to which they are
attached can form a cyclic acetal. Where R.sup.31 and R.sup.32 are
alkoxy, preferably they are C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkoxy, more
preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkoxy, more preferably still
methyl or ethyl, and still more preferably ethyl. Where R.sup.31
and R.sup.32 together form a cyclic acetal, preferably they form an
ethylene glycol acetal or a 1,3-propanediol acetal, more preferably
an ethylene glycol acetal. For example, compound 80 can be
contacted with an alcohol or a mixture of alcohols in the presence
of a catalyst such as an acid catalyst. Alternatively, compound 80
can be treated with an orthoformate such as triethyl orthoformate
or trimethyl orthoformate to form the acetal. 48
[0187] Compound 81 can be reduced to produce thiomethyl acetal
compound 82. It will be apparent to one of skill in the art given
the present disclosure that compound 82 can be used in place of
compound 12b in the reaction of Eq. 8a to form sulfide 10a.
Reduction conditions to convert compound 81 to compound 82 can vary
widely. For example, compound 81 can be treated with a hydrazide
such as p-toluenesulfonyl hydrazide in the presence of an amine
such as piperidine to form compound 82. 49
[0188] Once the nitro sulfide aldehyde compound 10 is formed in the
sulfide-forming step, 10 can be isolated by methods known in the
art or it can be oxidized to form nitro sulfone aldehyde compound 9
by methods described above. While intermediate compounds can
optionally be isolated, stored, or transported, it is convenient to
perform the sulfide-forming step and the oxidation step in one
reaction vessel without isolation of intermediate structures.
[0189] The method of the present invention can further comprise a
reduction step in which a substituted benzophenone compound 13
50
[0190] is reduced to form the substituted diphenyl methane compound
11 wherein R.sup.6 and X.sup.3 are defined above. The reduction
step is shown in Eq. 9. For example, the reduction step can be
carried out by contacting compound 13 with trifluoromethanesulfonic
acid (triflic acid) and a silane such as triethyl silane. It is
useful to perform the reduction step in the presence of a solvent,
for example a strong acid solvent such as trifluoroacetic acid.
When trifluoroacetic acid is used as a solvent, the triflic acid is
preferably used in a catalytic amount. Particularly, it is useful
to dissolve 13 in trifluoroacetic acid, add the triflic acid, and
then add triethyl silane. Reaction temperature during the addition
of the triethyl silane can be controlled, if necessary, by cooling.
The reaction temperature can be controlled in the range of about
25.degree. C. to about 100.degree. C., preferably about 30.degree.
C. to about 75.degree. C., and more preferably about 45.degree. C.
to about 50.degree. C. Other silanes are useful in the present
reaction also, for example, polymethyl hydrosiloxane (PMHS) or
other trialkylsilanes.
[0191] Alternatively, the reduction of 13 to 11 can be carried out
in a solvent such as methylene chloride in the presence of triflic
acid and a silane such as triethyl silane. When trifluoroacetic
acid is absent from the reaction mixture, typically a
larger-than-catalytic amount of triflic acid is required. Another
method of reducing 13 to 11 will comprise treating 13 with a Lewis
acid such as aluminum chloride and a silane such as triethyl
silane. In another alternative, the reduction can be carried out by
treating 13 with sodium borohydride in the presence of a catalyst.
In a further alternative, the reduction can be carried out by
treating 13 with sulfuric acid in the presence of a noble metal
catalyst such as a palladium catalyst, preferably Pd/C. In a still
further alternative, 13 can be reduced to the corresponding
alcohol, for example with a borohydride such as sodium borohydride.
The resulting alcohol can be treated, for example, with sodium
borohydride and a silane such as triethylsilane. The alcohol can be
reduced to 11 by other means, for example treating the alcohol with
a sulfonating reagent such as methanesulfonyl chloride or
toluenesulfonyl chloride and then treating the resulting sulfonic
acid ester with sodium borohydride.
[0192] The method of the present invention can also further
comprise an acylation step in which a protected phenol compound
having the structure of Formula 14 51
[0193] is treated with a substituted benzoyl compound having the
structure of Formula 15 52
[0194] under acylation conditions to produce a substituted
benzophenone compound having the structure of Formula 13 wherein
R.sup.6 and X.sup.3 are defined above; X.sup.5 can be hydroxy,
halo, or --OR.sup.14; and R.sup.14 can be an acyl group. This
overall acylation step is shown in Eq. 10. 53
[0195] The acylation conditions can comprise Friedel-Crafts
acylation conditions. For example the acylation conditions can
further comprise a Lewis acid. Useful Lewis acids include
aluminum-containing Lewis acids such as an aluminum trihalide;
boron-containing Lewis acids such as boron trifluoride, boron
trifluoride etherate, or boron trichloride; tin-containing Lewis
acids such as SnCl.sub.4; halogen-containing Lewis acids such as
HF; iron-containing Lewis acids such as FeCl.sub.3;
antimony-containing Lewis acids such as SbF.sub.5; and
zinc-containing Lewis acids such as ZnI.sub.2 or ZnCl.sub.2. When
the Lewis acid is an aluminum trihalide, preferably it is
AlCl.sub.3 or AlBr.sub.3, more preferably AlCl.sub.3.
Alternatively, the Lewis acid can be supported on a solid support
such as a clay. For example, the Lewis acid can comprise an
FeCl.sub.3 on clay composition such as Envirocat.
[0196] Alternatively, the acylation can be run in the presence of a
strong protic acid such as sulfuric acid; a phosphoric acid, for
example o-phosphoric acid or polyphosphoric acid (PPA); or a
sulfonic acid, for example p-toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic
acid, benzenesulfonic acid, or trifluoromethanesulfonic acid.
[0197] X.sup.5 can be hydroxy, halo, or --OR.sup.14. For example,
X.sup.5 can be hydroxy, bromo, iodo, or --OR.sup.14.
[0198] When X.sup.5 is halo, preferably it is chloro, bromo, or
iodo. In one useful embodiment X.sup.5 is chloro. In another useful
embodiment X.sup.5 is bromo or iodo, preferably bromo. When X.sup.5
is halo, it is preferred that the acylation conditions further
comprise a Lewis acid as described above, for example an aluminum
trihalide. Useful aluminum trihalides include aluminum tribromide
and aluminum trichloride, preferably aluminum trichloride.
[0199] When X.sup.5 is hydroxy, it is preferred that the acylation
conditions further comprise a strong protic acid. Some useful
strong protic acids include sulfuric acid, a sulfonic acid, or a
phosphorus oxy acid. Useful phosphorus oxy acids include
orthophosphoric acid (commonly known as phosphoric acid,
H.sub.3PO.sub.4), pyrophosphoric acid (H.sub.4P.sub.2O.sub.7), or
polyphosphoric acid (PPA). Preferably the phosphorus oxy acid is
phosphoric acid or polyphosphoric acid, preferably polyphosphoric
acid. Combinations of phosphorus oxy acids are also useful in the
present invention. The phosphorus oxy acid can be added as the acid
per se or it can be generated in situ, for example by the
hydrolysis of a phosphorus halide compound such as PCl.sub.5 or by
the hydrolysis of a phosphorus oxide compound such as
P.sub.2O.sub.5.
[0200] When R.sup.14 is --OR.sup.14 and R.sup.14 is an acyl group,
compound 15 is a carboxylic acid anhydride. The acid anhydride can
have a symmetrical structure; i.e., X.sup.5 can have the structure
of Formula 46. Alternatively, the acid anhydride can be a mixed
anhydride. For example R.sup.14 can be a formyl group, an acetyl
group, a benzoyl group or any other convenient acyl group. 54
[0201] When X.sup.5 is --OR.sup.14, it is preferred that the
acylation conditions further comprise a Lewis acid as described
above, for example an aluminum trihalide. Useful aluminum
trihalides include aluminum tribromide and aluminum trichloride,
preferably aluminum trichloride.
[0202] An alternative method for the preparation of compound 13 is
shown in Eq. 11. When X.sup.5 of compound 15 is halo or
--OR.sup.14, compound 15 can be treated with compound aryl metal
complex 56 wherein L is a metal-containing moiety and R.sup.6 is as
defined above. The group L can be, for example, MgX.sup.6, Na, or
Li, wherein X.sup.6 is a halogen. When L is MgX.sup.6 (in other
words, when 56 is a Grignard reagent), X is preferably Br, Cl, or
I; more preferably Br or Cl. 55
[0203] The present inventive method can further comprise one or
more steps wherein a nitro alkenyl aldehyde compound having the
structure of Formula 16 is reduced and reductively alkylated to
form an amino alkyl aldehyde compound having the structure of
Formula 17 (Eq. 12) wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.6 are defined above,
R.sup.7 is H or C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl, and t is 0,
1, or 2. Preferably R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alkyl
group, more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkyl group,
still more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.3 alkyl group, and
more preferably still methyl. Preferably t is 2. 56
[0204] The reduction and reductive alkylation of compound 16 to
compound 17 can be performed in a single step or it can be
performed in discrete steps. For example, the reduction of the
double bond can be done at the same time as the reductive
alkylation of the nitro group. Alternatively, the aliphatic C--C
double bond in compound 16 can be reduced to a single bond in a
step that is discrete from the reductive alkylation of the nitro
group to the dimethylamino group. As another alternative, in a
first step the nitro group and the alkene double bond of compound
16 can be reduced to an amino group and to an alkyl group,
respectively, and then the amino group can be methylated. The
reduction of the nitro group and the alkene double bond will be
readily performed with the use of a hydrogenation catalyst as is
known in the art. Such a reduction will run in the presence of
H.sub.2. The methylation of the reduced amino group can be
performed with essentially any methylating agent as is known in the
art, for example a methyl halide such as methyl iodide, methyl
bromide, or methyl chloride. Another useful methylating agent is
dimethyl sulfate.
[0205] The conditions under which compound 16 is reduced and
reductively alkylated can include, for example, contacting 16 with
a source of formaldehyde and a source of H.sub.2 in the presence of
a catalyst. The conversion is preferably performed at elevated
H.sub.2 pressure. It is useful to perform the conversion at H.sub.2
pressures ranging from about 100 to about 700,000 kPa, preferably
from about 200 to about 300,000 kPa, more preferably from about 300
to about 100,000 kPa, still more preferably from about 350 to about
10,000 kPa, and more preferably still from about 400 to about 1000
kPa.
[0206] The source of formaldehyde can be essentially any source
that produces the equivalent of CH.sub.2O. For example, the source
of formaldehyde can be formalin, an acetal of formaldehyde such as
dimethoxymethane, paraformaldehyde, trioxane, or any polymer of
CH.sub.2O. Conveniently the source of formaldehyde can be formalin,
and preferably about 35% to about 37% formalin.
[0207] The catalyst for the reduction and reductive alkylation can
be either a heterogeneous catalyst or a homogeneous catalyst.
Preferably the catalyst is a metal, for example the catalyst can be
a noble metal catalyst. Useful noble metal catalysts include Pt,
Pd, Ru, and Rh. Preferably the noble metal catalyst is a Pd
catalyst. The noble metal catalyst can be used either in a
homogeneous or in a heterogeneous form. When used in a
heterogeneous form, the catalyst can be used, for example, as the
metal per se or on a solid support such as carbon or an aluminum
oxide. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the catalyst
comprises palladium and more preferably Pd on carbon. In another
embodiment the catalyst comprises a nickel catalyst such as a
high-surface area nickel catalyst. A useful high-surface area
nickel catalyst is Raney nickel.
[0208] An acid can be present in the reaction mixture during the
reduction and reductive alkylation. Preferably the acid is a strong
acid and more preferably a strong mineral acid. For example, the
acid can be sulfuric acid.
[0209] A solvent can conveniently be present in the reaction
mixture during the reduction and reductive alkylation. Useful
solvents include an alcohol, an ether, a carboxylic acid, an
aromatic solvent, an alkane, a cycloalkane, or water. Preferably
the solvent is an alcohol solvent such as a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10alcohol; more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5
alcohol; and more preferably still methanol, ethanol, propanol, or
isopropyl alcohol. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the
solvent is ethanol.
[0210] The reduction and reductive alkylation reaction can be run
at any convenient temperature, for example from about 0.degree. C.
to about 200.degree. C., preferably from about 10.degree. C. to
about 150.degree. C., more preferably from about 15.degree. C. to
about 100.degree. C., still more preferably from about 20.degree.
C. to about 75.degree. C., more preferably still from about
25.degree. C. to about 60.degree. C., and more preferably yet from
about 30.degree. C. to about 40.degree. C.
[0211] Alternatively, the conversion of 16 into 17 can be performed
in discrete steps. For example, in a first step the nitro group and
the alkene double bond of compound 16 can be reduced to an amino
group and to an alkyl group, respectively. In a second step the
amino group can be methylated. The reduction of the nitro group and
the alkene double bond can be readily performed with the use of a
hydrogenation catalyst as is known in the art. Such a reduction
will run in the presence of H.sub.2. The methylation of the reduced
amino group can be performed with essentially any methylating agent
as is known in the art, for example a methyl halide such as methyl
iodide, methyl bromide, or methyl chloride. Another useful
methylating agent is dimethyl sulfate.
[0212] An alternative route to compound 17 is shown in Eq. 13,
wherein u of compound 16a is 0 or 1 (in other words, when compound
16a is a sulfide or a sulfoxide compound). In the instant route,
compound 16a can be reduced by methods described herein (for
example by contacting 16a with H.sub.2 and a hydrogenation catalyst
such as Pd/C) to form compound 57 wherein u is 0 or 1, R.sup.1,
R.sup.6, and R.sup.7 are as defined above, and R.sup.19 can be
--NH.sub.2, --NHOH, or --NO.sub.2. Compound 57 can be oxidized (for
example by methods described herein for the conversion of sulfides
or sulfoxides to sulfones) to compound 58 wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.6,
and R.sup.7 are as defined above, and R.sup.20 can be --NH.sub.2,
--NHOH, or --NO.sub.2. Compound 58 can be alkylated or reductively
alkylated by methods described herein to form compound 17 wherein t
is 2. 57
[0213] The method of the present invention can further comprise a
thermolysis step wherein an acetal compound having the structure of
Formula 18 58
[0214] is thermolyzed to form the nitro alkenyl aldehyde compound
16, wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.6, and t are defined above; R.sup.7 can
be H or C.sub.1 to about C.sub.17 hydrocarbyl; and R.sup.13 can be
H or C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl. The thermolysis step is
shown in Eq. 14. Preferably t is 2. Preferably R.sup.7 is a C.sub.1
to about C.sub.10 alkyl group, more preferably a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.5 alkyl group, still more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.3
alkyl group, and more preferably still methyl. R.sup.13 is
preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10hydrocarbyl group, more
preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkenyl group, still more
preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkenyl group, and more
preferably still a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.4 alkenyl group. In one
preferred embodiment, R.sup.13 is a group having the structure of
Formula 43 wherein R.sup.7 is as defined above. Preferably R.sup.13
is 1-buten-3-yl. 59
[0215] The thermolysis reaction can advantageously be performed in
the presence of a base. Useful bases include without limitation a
metal hydride, a metal hydroxide, a metal carbonate, or a metal
bicarbonate. Preferably the base is a metal hydride such as calcium
hydride, lithium hydride, sodium hydride, or potassium hydride.
More preferably the base is calcium hydride. Other useful bases
include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate,
sodium carbonate, potassium bicarbonate, or sodium bicarbonate. The
thermolysis reaction can be run, for example, by contacting
compound 18 with the base over a period of time, preferably under
essentially anhydrous conditions. Surprisingly, the presence of a
soluble base such as triethylamine or pyridine during the
conversion of 18a to 47 can be advantageously used to slow the
reaction rate relative to reaction conditions in which the soluble
base is absent. The thermolysis can be run in the presence of a
solvent. Essentially any solvent that is unreactive under the
thermolysis reaction conditions is useful. Aprotic solvents are
especially useful and aromatic solvents are preferred, such as
benzene, toluene, o-xylene, m-xylene, p-xylene, mesitylene, and
naphthalene. Especially preferred solvents include toluene,
o-xylene, m-xylene, p-xylene, or mesitylene; more preferably
toluene, o-xylene, m-xylene, or p-xylene; and more preferably still
toluene or o-xylene. Other useful solvents include an ether such as
tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, or diphenyl ether; an ester such as
ethyl acetate; an alcohol such as ethanol or t-butyl alcohol; or a
ketone such as acetone or benzophenone.
[0216] In another embodiment, the thermolysis can be performed
neat, i.e., in the absence of a solvent. For example, compound 18
can be heated neat to produce compound 16a. When compound 18 is
heated neat, the thermolysis can be run, if desired, at subambient
pressure. For example, the thermolysis can be run at a pressure at
which elimination products produced by the thermolysis boil away.
Operating the reaction under such conditions will aid in driving
the thermolysis reaction to completion. Advantageously, the
reaction pressure during the thermolysis can be less than about 760
mmHg (101 kPa), preferably less than about 500 mmHg (66.6 kPa),
more preferably less than about 250 mmHg (33.3 kPa), more
preferably still less than about 100 mmHg (13.3 kPa), still more
preferably less than about 50 mmHg (6.7 kPa), and more preferably
yet less than about 10 mmHg (1.3 kPa).
[0217] The thermolysis can be run over a wide range of
temperatures. For example the thermolysis can be run at a
temperature in the range of about 10.degree. C. to about
250.degree. C., preferably about 50.degree. C. to about 200.degree.
C., more preferably about 75.degree. C. to about 175.degree. C. and
more preferably still about 100.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C.
Conveniently the thermolysis can be run in a refluxing solvent, for
example refluxing o-xylene. Alternatively, the thermolysis can be
performed at pressures above ambient pressure, thereby allowing the
reaction to proceed at temperatures above the ambient-pressure
boiling point of the solvent.
[0218] The thermolysis reaction is preferably performed under dry
or essentially anhydrous conditions and in the absence of acid to
prevent reverse reaction and byproduct formation.
[0219] Without intending to limit the scope of the present
invention, the thermolysis reaction to form compound 16 is believed
to proceed by the intermediacy of an enol ether compound. For
example, bis-butenyl acetal compound 18a is thought to eliminate a
molecule of 3-buten-2-ol to form enol ether 47 (a pre-Claisen
intermediate) as shown in Eq. 15. Compound 47 is then believed to
undergo a [3,3]-sigmatropic shift (also known as a Claisen
rearrangement) to form butenyl sulfone aldehyde compound 31 as
shown in Eq. 16. Although compound 47 is shown herein as having a
E-configuration across the double bond between the methanesulfonyl
moiety and the alkoxy moiety, it is also possible that this
compound can form in the Z-configuration. 60
[0220] The conversion of 18a to 31 can be carried out for example
by heating at 145.degree. C. a toluene or o-xylene solution of a
mixture comprising 18a or a mixture of 18a and 47, preferably in
the presence of calcium hydride. Alternatively, the conversion of
18a to 31 can be achieved by filtering crude 18a through an acidic
medium such as silica gel or a basic medium such as basic alumna
prior to heating.
[0221] The addition of soluble bases such as triethylamine or
pyridine during the conversion of 18a to 47 can be used, if
desired, to decrease the thermolysis reaction rate relative to the
situation in which the soluble base is absent.
[0222] Compound 18 can be prepared by a step in which a monoalkyl
aldehyde compound having the structure of Formula 19 is reacted
with an allyl alcohol compound having the structure of Formula 20
in the presence of a hydroxylated solvent having the structure
HOR.sup.13 to form an acetal compound having the structure of
Formula 18, wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.6, R.sup.7, R.sup.13, and t are
as defined above. Preferably t is 2. In a preferred embodiment,
R.sup.13 has the structure of Formula 43. For example, this
embodiment can be realized if the allyl alcohol compound 20 itself
is used as a hydroxylated solvent, preponderating over another
hydroxylated solvent or essentially in the absence of another
hydroxylated solvent. The conversion of compound 19 into compound
18 is shown in Eq. 17. 61
[0223] Acetal compound 18 can be prepared by numerous methods
employing various conditions known in the art. The reaction to form
the acetal is preferably performed in the presence of an acid
catalyst. The catalyst can be, for example, a strong acid such as
sulfuric acid, hydrochloric acid, phosphorous acid, phosphoric
acid, trifluoroacetic acid, or a sulfonic acid. Useful sulfonic
acids include methanesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid,
benzenesulfonic acid, and trifluoromethanesulfonic acid. However,
organic acids and acidic heterogeneous catalysts also work to
mediate this reaction, for example pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate,
acetic acid, propionic acid, Amberlyst 15, acidic zeolites, acidic
clay, Pd(PhCN).sub.2Cl.sub.2, and AlCl(CH.sub.2CH.sub.3).sub.2.
Virtually any Bronsted-Lowry or Lewis acid can be employed as a
catalyst. The acetal-forming reaction can if desired be performed
in the presence of a solvent. Useful solvents include chlorinated
solvents such as methylene chloride, chloroform, or carbon
tetrachloride; aromatic solvents such as benzene, toluene,
o-xylene, m-xylene, p-xylene, mesitylene, or
trifluoromethylbenzene; aprotic solvents including CH.sub.3CN,
ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, butyl acetate, tetrahydrofuran,
methyl isobutyl ketone, 1,4-dioxane; or alcohols such as
3-buten-2-ol. The reaction can be run at essentially any convenient
temperature that does not lead to significant degradation of
starting material or product. For example, the temperature can be
in the range of about 0.degree. C. to about 200.degree. C.;
preferably about 20.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C.; more
preferably about 30.degree. C. to about 135.degree. C. The reaction
can be performed in a refluxing solvent such as refluxing methylene
chloride. The conversion can conveniently be performed during
azeotropic removal (distillation) of the solvent and water. For
example, the conversion can be achieved during azeotropic removal
of toluene (about 105.degree. C. to about 115.degree. C.) or of
xylene (about 125.degree. C. to about 135.degree. C.).
[0224] Optionally, removal of water during the reaction or
concomitant with the reaction can advantageously be used to
increase conversion or yield. Without meaning to limit the scope of
the invention, it is believed that removal of water drives the
acetal-forming reaction toward completion. For example, process
apparatus similar to a Dean-Stark trap or azeotropic distillation
equipment can be used to remove water. Other methods such as
molecular sieve (zeolites), isopropenyl acetate, and trimethyl
orthoformate can also be used.
[0225] Advantageously, the conversion of 18a to 47 and the
conversion of 47 to 31 can be carried out sequentially or
simultaneously in a single reaction vessel or in a single reaction
mixture without isolation. To further advantage, the preparation of
the acetal 18 from aldehyde 19, the conversion of 18 to the
corresponding enol ether intermediate, and the conversion of the
enol ether intermediate to 31 can all be carried out in a single
reaction vessel or reaction mixture. For example,
2-(((4-methylphenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hexanal can be heated in a
solvent such as toluene in the presence of 3-buten-2-ol and
p-toluenesulfonic acid with removal of water (e.g., with a
Dean-Stark trap) to produce
2-butyl-2-(((4-methylphenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hex-4-enal.
[0226] This useful and surprising overall method for preparing a
2-alkenyl-2,2disubstituted aldehyde 49 has general applicability.
The general method can be employed in the conversion of a
3-sulfur-propionaldehyde compound 48 to the
3-sulfur-propionaldehyde olefin compound 49 as shown in Eq. 18.
Conditions described above for the conversion of compound 19 to
compound 16 are useful in the broad reaction of Eq. 18. 62
[0227] In the reaction of Eq. 18:
[0228] R.sup.15 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl,
alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkylaryl, and acyl, wherein
alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkylaryl, and acyl
optionally are substituted with at least one R.sup.22 group;
[0229] R.sup.16, R.sup.17, R.sup.21a, and R.sup.21b are
independently selected from the group consisting of H and
hydrocarbyl;
[0230] R.sup.22 is selected from the group consisting of H,
--NO.sub.2, amino, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkylamino, di(C.sub.1
to about C.sub.10)alkylamino, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alkylthio,
hydroxy, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alkoxy, cyanato, isocyanato,
halogen, OR.sup.6, SR.sup.6, SR.sup.6R.sup.6a, and
NR.sup.6R.sup.6a;
[0231] R.sup.6 and R.sup.6a independently are selected from the
group consisting of H and a protecting group; and
[0232] q is 0, 1, or 2.
[0233] Preferably R.sup.15 is selected from the group consisting of
aryl, alkylaryl, and arylalkylaryl. More preferably R.sup.15 is
selected from the group consisting of aryl, alkylaryl, and
arylalkylaryl, wherein aryl, alkylaryl, and arylalkylaryl are
optionally substituted with at least one R.sup.22 group. More
preferably still, R.sup.15 is arylalkylaryl optionally substituted
with at least one R.sup.22 group, and more preferably still
R.sup.15 is 2-(phenylmethyl)phenyl optionally substituted with at
least one R.sup.22 group. R.sup.15 therefore can include without
limitation any of the moieties shown in Table A, wherein R.sup.6 is
as defined above.
1TABLE A Number Structure 59a 63 59b 64 59c 65 59d 66 59e 67 59f 68
59g 69 59h 70 59i 71 59j 72
[0234] When R.sup.16 is hydrocarbyl, it can be unsubstituted
hydrocarbyl, for example C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl and
preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkyl. More preferably, when
R.sup.16 is unsubstituted hydrocarbyl, it is ethyl or butyl.
[0235] In the reaction of Eq. 18, R.sup.17 is preferably
hydrocarbyl, more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl, still
more preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkyl, and more preferably
still methyl.
[0236] R.sup.21a and R.sup.21b preferably independently are
selected from the group consisting of H, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10
alkyl, C.sub.2 to about C.sub.10 alkenyl, and C.sub.2 to about
C.sub.10 alkynyl; more preferably R.sup.21a and R.sup.21b are both
H.
[0237] Preferably q is 2 in the reaction of Eq. 18.
[0238] The reaction of Eq. 18 can be run at essentially any
convenient temperature that does not lead to significant
degradation of starting material or product. For example, the
temperature can be in the range of about 0.degree. C. to about
200.degree. C.; preferably about 20.degree. C. to about 150.degree.
C.; more preferably about 30.degree. C. to about 135.degree. C.;
and more preferably still about 30.degree. C. to about 100.degree.
C.
[0239] Compound 48 can be prepared by any of a variety of methods.
For example, 48 can be prepared by the reaction of Eq. 18a wherein
an acrolein compound (5) is treated with a nucleophilic
organosulphur compound (66) to produce compound 48. The reaction of
Eq. 18a is preferably performed in the presence of a base,
preferably an amine, and more preferably an alkylamine such as
triethylamine. Preferably the base is present in a catalytic
amount. In Eq. 18a R.sup.15, R.sup.16, R.sup.21a, R.sup.21b, and q
are as defined above. 73
[0240] The monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde compound 19 can be prepared
in a sulfone-forming reaction by treating a substituted diphenyl
methane compound 11 under sulfination conditions and coupling it
with a 2-substituted acrolein compound having the structure of
Formula 21 to form compound 19. The sulfone-forming reaction is
shown in Eq. 19. 74
[0241] The sulfination conditions can comprise, for example,
treating compound 11 with a source of a metal sulfide such as
Na.sub.2S, Na.sub.2S.sub.2, or Li.sub.2S, preferably
Na.sub.2S.sub.2. The sulfination conditions can further comprise
water. After treating with the metal sulfide, the substrate can be
oxidized to form sulfinic acid 51 or a salt thereof (Eq. 20). A
variety of oxidizing conditions can be used to effect this
oxidation. For example, a useful oxidizing agent includes a source
of hydrogen peroxide. 75
[0242] During the addition of the metal sulfide, the temperature of
the mixture can vary over a wide range. It is useful to react
compound 11 with the metal sulfide at a temperature of about
25.degree. C. to about 125.degree. C., preferably about 40.degree.
C. to about 100.degree. C., and more preferably about 50.degree. C.
to about 80.degree. C. This reaction can be run in the presence of
a solvent. Essentially any solvent into which hydrogen peroxide can
dissolve is useful for the present reaction. Useful solvents
include an alcohol such as a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10alcohol;
preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alcohol; more preferably
methanol, ethanol, propanol, or 2-propanol; still more preferably
ethanol. Other useful solvents include amides such as
dimethylacetamide. During the oxidation with hydrogen peroxide, the
reaction is preferably maintained at less than about 30.degree. C.,
more preferably less than about 25.degree. C., more preferably less
than about 20.degree. C. If desired, sulfinic acid compound 51 can
be isolated as the acid or, preferably, as a salt.
[0243] Alternatively, 51 can be further used with or without
isolation. For example, 51 can be treated with acrolein compound 21
to produce monoalkyl sulfone aldehyde compound 19. The reaction
with compound 21 can be done at essentially any convenient
temperature, including ambient temperature. The present reaction
can also be run in the presence of a solvent. Useful solvents
include nitriles such as acetonitrile; aromatic solvents such as
benzene, toluene, o-xylene, m-xylene, p-xylene, or mesitylene; or
chlorinated solvents such as methylene chloride. In one embodiment,
the present reaction is run under biphasic conditions in the
presence of tetrabutylammonium iodide.
[0244] When R.sup.6 is methyl and when R.sup.1 is 2-butylacrolein,
the product of the sulfone-forming step is butyl sulfone aldehyde
32. 76
[0245] The reactions described herein can be run individually, for
example to prepare intermediate compounds for storage, use in other
reactions, or for commerce. Alternatively two or more of the
reactions can be combined. For example, an overall process for the
preparation of benzylammonium compound 1 is shown in FIG. 3.
Methods and reagents described in this disclosure can be used in
the process of FIG. 3. Diphenyl methane compound 11 can, if
desired, be prepared by the process shown in FIG. 4, also using
methods and reagents described herein.
[0246] The methods described herein can also be combined with other
reactions in the art and still be within the scope and spirit of
the present invention. For example, PCT Patent Application No. WO
99/32478 describes a method of preparing an enantiomerically
enriched tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxide such as compound (4R,5R)-24
(Example 9 in WO 99/32478) using an asymmetric oxidizing agent. The
process of FIG. 5 shows one of many ways in which an
enantiomerically enriched tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxide 24 (for
example (4R,5R)-24) can be used in combination with the methods of
the present invention to prepare an enantiomerically enriched
benzylammonium compound (for example (4R,5R)-1 and more
specifically (4R,5R)-41). The enantiomerically enriched compound 24
as used can be prepared as in WO 99/32478 or it can be prepared
using methods disclosed hereinbelow. As used herein, asterisks in
chemical structures represent chiral centers. 77
[0247] Other methods can alternatively be used in the process of
the present invention to obtain an enantiomerically enriched
benzylammonium compound. For example, one of the intermediates or
products having one or more chiral centers in FIG. 3 can be
optically resolved. An optical resolution is any technique by which
an enantiomer of a compound is enriched in concentration relative
to another enantiomer of the compound. Useful methods of optical
resolution include co-crystallization with a chiral agent, for
example as a salt with an optically active counterion, i.e.,
crystallization of a diastereomeric salt. Another useful technique
for the optical resolution of the compounds in the present
invention is to derivatize a compound having one or more chiral
centers with an optically active derivatizing agent thereby forming
a diastereomeric derivative. The diastereomeric derivative can then
be separated into its individual diastereomers for example by
fractional crystallization or chromatography.
[0248] Another method useful for optically resolving intermediates
or products in the present process is chiral chromatography. Any of
several types of chiral chromatography can be used in the instant
invention. For example, the chiral chromatographic technique can
include continuous chromatography, semi-continuous chromatography,
or single column (batch) chromatography. An example of continuous
chromatography is simulated moving bed chromatography (SMB). U.S.
Pat. No. 2,985,589, herein incorporated by reference, describes the
general theory of SMB. Another reference that describes the general
theory of SMB is U.S. Pat. No. 2,957,927, herein incorporated by
reference. Still another reference describing SMB is U.S. Pat. No.
5,889,186.
[0249] Still another chiral chromatographic technique useful in the
present invention is a semi-continuous technique such as
closed-loop recycling with periodic intra-profile injection
(CLRPIPI). CLRPIPI is described by C. M. Grill in J. Chrom. A, 796,
101-113 (1998).
[0250] Single column or batch chromatography is also useful in the
present invention for performing the optical resolution.
[0251] In any of the chiral chromatographic techniques referenced
herein, a variety of conditions can be used. Each of the techniques
requires a stationary phase and a mobile phase. The stationary
phase can comprise a chiral substrate. For example the chiral
substrate can comprise a saccharide or a polysaccharide such as an
amylosic, cellulosic, xylan, curdlan, dextran, or inulan saccharide
or polysaccharide. The chiral substrate optionally can be on a
solid support such as silica gel, zirconium, alumina, clay, glass,
a resin, or a ceramic. The chiral substrate can, for example, be
absorbed by the solid support, adsorbed onto the solid support, or
chemically bound to the solid support. Alternatively, the
stationary phase can comprise another chiral substrate such as a
tartaric acid derivative. In another alternative, the stationary
phase can comprise a derivatized silica sorbent such as a Pirkle
sorbent.
[0252] The chiral chromatographic technique of the present
invention also comprises a mobile phase. Any mobile phase that is
capable of differentially partitioning each enantiomer between the
stationary phase and the mobile phase is useful in the present
invention. For example, the mobile phase can comprise water, an
alcohol, a hydrocarbon, a nitrile, an ester, a chlorinated
hydrocarbon, an aromatic solvent, a ketone, or an ether. If the
mobile phase comprises an alcohol, preferably it is a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.10 alcohol, more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.8
alcohol, and more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alcohol. If
the mobile phase comprises a hydrocarbon, preferably it is a
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 hydrocarbon, more preferably a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.1-5 hydrocarbon, and still more preferably a C.sub.1 to
about C.sub.10 hydrocarbon. Other useful solvents include
acetonitrile, propionitrile, ethyl acetate, methylene chloride,
toluene, benzene, xylene, mesitylene, acetone, methyl t-butyl
ether, or diethyl ether. Preferably the mobile phase comprises
acetonitrile, toluene, or methyl t-butyl ether. The mobile phase
can also comprise a mixture of solvents. A preferred mobile phase
mixture comprises toluene and methyl t-butyl ether. The mobile
phase can also comprise a supercritical fluid such as supercritical
CO.sub.2. Carbon dioxide can also be used as a mobile phase in a
subcritical state such as liquid CO.sub.2. Supercritical or
subcritical CO.sub.2 can also be used in combination with any of
the other mobile phases mentioned above.
[0253] The chiral separation can be performed at any convenient
temperature, preferably about 5.degree. C. to about 45.degree. C.,
more preferably about 20.degree. C. to about 40.degree. C.
[0254] The optical resolution can be performed on any convenient
compound or intermediate having a chiral center in the preparation
of the benzylammonium compound. For example, the optical resolution
can be performed on any one or more of compounds 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12, 35, 36, or 37. In one preferred embodiment, the optical
resolution is performed on compound 7. A further preferred
embodiment is one in which compound 7 is represented by compound
24, preferably compound syn-24.
[0255] Typically in an optical resolution, two enantiomers are
partially or essentially completely separated from each other. If
the goal of the separation is to obtain an enriched sample of one
desired enantiomer, it is useful to have a method of converting or
recycling the other enantiomer into the desired enantiomer or into
an essentially racemic mixture of enantiomers so that further
optical resolution can be performed. Where more than one chiral
center exists in a molecule, a plurality of diastereomers can
exist. Similarly, diastereomers can be separated to obtain an
enriched sample of one or more desired diastereomers. It is further
useful to have a method of converting one or more other
diastereomers into the desired diastereomer(s) or into a mixture of
diastereomers so that further separation can be performed.
[0256] Surprisingly, it has been found that this conversion or
recycle of stereoisomers can be performed in the process of the
present invention. As used herein the word "stereoisomer" includes
enantiomer and diastereomer. A method is now disclosed of treating
a stereoisomer of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound 22 78
[0257] wherein Formula 22 comprises a (4,5)-stereoisomer selected
from the group consisting of a (4S,5S)-diastereomer, a
(4R,5R)-diastereomer, a (4R,5S)-diastereomer and a
(4S,5R)-diastereomer, to produce a mixture comprising the
(4S,5S)-diastereomer and the (4R,5R)-diastereomer, wherein the
method comprises contacting a base with a feedstock composition
comprising the (4,5)-stereoisomer of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound, thereby producing a mixture of diastereomers of the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound; and wherein:
[0258] R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl;
[0259] R.sup.8 is selected from the group consisting of H,
hydrocarbyl, heterocyclyl, ((hydroxyalkyl)aryl)alkyl,
((cycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl, ((heterocycloalkyl)alkylaryl)alkyl,
((quaternary heterocycloalkyl)alkylar- yl)alkyl, heteroaryl,
quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary
heteroarylalkyl,
[0260] wherein hydrocarbyl, heterocycle, heteroaryl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, and quaternary heteroarylalkyl
optionally have one or more carbons replaced by a moiety selected
from the group consisting of O, NR.sup.3,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, S, SO, SO.sub.2,
S.sup.+R.sup.3A.sup.-, PR.sup.3, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-,
P(O)R.sup.3 phenylene, carbohydrate, amino acid, peptide, and
polypeptide, and
[0261] R.sup.8 is optionally substituted with one or more moieties
selected from the group consisting of sulfoalkyl, quaternary
heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl, OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.- sup.5A.sup.-, SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3,
SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo, CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN,
halogen, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM, SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4,
PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24, P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.s- up.5A.sup.-,
S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, and C(O)OM;
[0262] R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 are as defined above;
[0263] R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from the
substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M;
[0264] A.sup.- is a pharmaceutically acceptable anion and M is a
pharmaceutically acceptable cation;
[0265] R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of H,
hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, heterocyclyl,
heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl,
OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.- sup.5A.sup.-,
SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.s- up.5A.sup.-,
S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, and C(O)OM;
[0266] n is a number from 0 to 4;
[0267] X.sup.7 is S, NH, or O; and
[0268] x is 1 or 2.
[0269] Preferably the group X.sup.7R.sup.8 in compound 22 is in the
3' or the 4' position of the phenyl group, more preferably the 4'
position. Preferably X.sup.7 is NH or O, more preferably O.
[0270] A wide variety of bases can be used to effect the conversion
or recycle of stereoisomers of the present invention. For example,
the base can be an alkali metal hydroxide, an alkaline earth metal
hydroxide, an alkali metal alkoxide, a metal hydride, an alkali
metal amide, and an alkali metal hydrocarbyl base. Preferably the
base is an alkali metal amide, a metal hydride, or an alkali metal
alkoxide. Useful alkali metal amides include lithium diethylamide
(LDA), lithium diisopropylamide, lithium N-methylanilide, lithium
methylamide, potassium amide, sodamide, and
((CH.sub.3).sub.3Si).sub.2NNa. Useful metal hydrides include
lithium hydride, sodium hydride, and calcium hydride. Useful alkali
metal alkoxides include for example a lithium alkoxide, a sodium
alkoxide, and a potassium alkoxide; preferably a sodium alkoxide or
a potassium alkoxide. The alkoxide is preferably a C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.10alkoxide; more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.6
alkoxide; still more preferably a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.5 alkoxide
such as a methoxide, an ethoxide, a n-propoxide, an isopropoxide, a
n-butoxide, a sec-butoxide, an isobutoxide, a t-butoxide, or a
t-amylate. A particularly useful alkoxide is potassium t-butoxide.
R.sup.8 can be for example H, C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl,
hydroxyalkylarylalkyl, or heterocycloalkylalkylarylalkyl.
Preferably R.sup.8 is H, or C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl; more
preferably C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20 alkyl; still more preferably
C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alkyl; and more preferably still C.sub.1
to about C.sub.5 alkyl. In a particularly preferred embodiment
R.sup.8 is methyl. R.sup.9 can for example be H, amino, alkylamino,
alkoxy, or nitro; preferably H or alkylamino, more preferably
alkylamino, and more preferably still dimethylamino. In a
particularly preferred embodiment, R.sup.9 is dimethylamino and n
is 1. When R.sup.9 is dimethylamino and n is 1, it is preferred
that R.sup.9 be located at the 7-position of the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound structure. R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are
as defined above. In one preferred embodiment both of R.sup.1 and
R.sup.2 are butyl. In another preferred embodiment one of one of
R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is ethyl and the other of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2
is butyl. It is preferred that the (4,5)-stereoisomer of compound
22 is a (4S,5S) diastereomer, a (4R,5S) diastereomer, or a (4S,5R)
diastereomer; more preferably a (4S,5S) diastereomer. The present
conversion conditions can also comprise a solvent. Useful solvents
include any solvent that is essentially non-reactive toward the
base under the reaction conditions. Preferred solvents include
ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, or dioxane; or
alcohols such as a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.10 alcohol. If the
solvent is an alcohol, preferably it is a C.sub.1 to about C.sub.6
alcohol; more preferably methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl
alcohol, butanol, t-butyl alcohol, or t-amyl alcohol; still more
preferably ethanol, t-butyl alcohol, or t-amyl alcohol; and more
preferably still t-butyl alcohol. The conversion of the present
invention is particularly advantageous when the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 24.
79
[0271] The feedstock composition used in the stereoisomeric
conversion of the present invention can further comprise amino
sulfone aldehyde compound 8 wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and R.sup.6
are as defined above.
[0272] An alternate method for the stereoisomeric conversion of the
present invention comprises treating compound 22 under elimination
conditions to produce a dihydrobenzothiepine compound having the
structure of Formula 23 80
[0273] and oxidizing the dihydrobenzothiepine compound to produce
the mixture of stereoisomers including the (4S,5S)-diastereomer and
the (4R,5R)-diastereomer. R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.8, R.sup.9, n,
X.sup.7, and x are as defined above. The elimination conditions can
comprise an acid or the conditions can comprise a base, or the
elimination conditions can occur at a neutral pH. The elimination
conditions can further comprise derivatizing the diastereomer of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound to form a tetrahydrobenzothiepine
derivative having an elimination-labile group at the 4-position,
and eliminating the elimination-labile group to form the
dihydrobenzothiepine compound. The elimination-labile group can be,
for example, acid labile or base labile. The elimination-labile
group can also be thermally labile. For example, it can be an
acetate group or a 3-buten-2-oxy group. The oxidation step can
comprise an alcohol-forming step in which the dihydrobenzothiepine
compound is reacted under alcohol-forming conditions to produce a
mixture of stereoisomers of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound.
For example the alcohol-formation conditions can comprise
oxymercuration-demercuration. In another example, the
alcohol-formation conditions can comprise epoxidation followed by
reduction using conditions described in PCT Patent Application No.
WO 97/33882, herein incorporated by reference. Preferably the
(4,5)-stereoisomer is selected from the group consisting of a
(4S,5S) diastereomer, a (4R,5S) diastereomer, and a (4S,5R)
diastereomer; more preferably a (4S,5S) diastereomer. In a
particularly preferred embodiment, the tetrahydrobenzothiepine
compound has the structure of compound 24 and the
dihydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of compound 25.
81
[0274] It would be particularly useful to have a form of the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compounds that is easily handled,
reproducible in form, easily prepared, and that is nonhygroscopic.
A hygroscopic compound can absorb water, for example from the
ambient atmosphere, and a sample of the compound can gain weight as
more water is absorbed. Absorbance of water into a sample of a
compound can also affect measurements of the compound, for example,
infrared spectra. Hygroscopicity of a pharmaceutical compound can
be problematic if that compound absorbs water to an extent and at
such a rate that weighing and measurement of the compound is made
difficult. Accurate weighing and measurement of a pharmaceutical
compound is important to assure that patients receive an
appropriate dose.
[0275] Crystal forms of the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compounds
described herein and particularly of compound 41 are now
disclosed.
[0276] A first crystal form (Form I) of compound 41 or its
enantiomer has a melting point or a decomposition point of about
220.degree. C. to about 235.degree. C., preferably about
228.degree. C. to about 232.degree. C., and more preferably about
230.degree. C. Form I can be prepared, for example, by
crystallization of compound 41 or its enantiomer from a solvent
that comprises acetonitrile, methanol, or methyl t-butyl ether.
Preferably, Form I can be prepared by crystallization of compound
41 or its enantiomer from a solvent comprising methanol or methyl
t-butyl ether, and more preferably from a solvent comprising
methanol and methyl t-butyl ether. Methods for the preparation of
Form I include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,994,391, herein
incorporated by reference, examples 1426 and 1426a.
[0277] Another crystal form (Form II) of compound 41 or its
enantiomer has a melting point or a decomposition point of about
278.degree. C. to about 285.degree. C. Form II can be prepared, for
example, by crystallization of compound 41 or its enantiomer from a
solvent, preferably a ketone solvent, more preferably a ketone
solvent comprising methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) or acetone. By way of
example, compound 41 or its (4S,5S) enantiomer can be mixed in a
solvent comprising MEK and Form II can be induced to crystallize
from that solution. Preferably, compound 41 or its (4S,5S)
enantiomer is dissolved in a solvent comprising a ketone such as
MEK and a quantity of water (for example about 0.5% to about 5%
water by weight, preferably 1% to about 4% water by weight, and
more preferably 2% to about 4% water by weight). The
crystallization can be induced, for example, by evaporating the
solvent (e.g., by distillation or by exposure to a stream of a gas
such as air or nitrogen for a period of time) or by evaporating the
water (e.g. by distillation or azeotroping). Alternatively, the
crystallization will be induced by other traditional
crystallization methods such as chilling or by addition of another
solvent or by addition of a seed crystal. As another alternative,
crystallization can be induced by adding additional MEK (decreasing
the % by weight of water in the crystallization solvent). Form II
can conveniently be caused to precipitate from a reaction mixture
in which compound 41 is prepared (e.g., the reaction of (4R,5R)-27
with DABCO) by running that reaction in a solvent comprising MEK,
and preferably in a solvent comprising MEK and about 0.5% to about
5% by weight of water. The precipitation can be facilitated by
distilling solvent off of the reaction mixture.
[0278] Therefore in one embodiment, the present invention provides
the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound in a useful crystalline form.
Particularly, the present invention provides a crystalline form
(i.e., Form II) of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 71
and wherein the crystalline form has a melting point or a
decomposition point of about 278.degree. C. to about 285.degree. C.
Preferably, Form II has a melting point or a decomposition point of
about 280.degree. C. to about 283.degree. C., and more preferably
about 282.degree. C. 82
[0279] Preferably, the compound of Formula 71 has an absolute
configuration of (4R,5R) (i.e., compound 41) and this is a
preferred absolute configuration for the compound forming the
crystal structure of Form II. However, the (4S,5S) enantiomer of
compound 71 can also be prepared in the crystalline form of the
present invention.
[0280] FIG. 6 shows typical X-ray powder diffraction patterns for
Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot (b)) of compound 41. Preferably
the Form II crystalline form has the X-ray powder diffraction
pattern shown in FIG. 6, plot (b). Typically, Form II has an X-ray
powder diffraction pattern with peaks at about 9.2 degrees 2 theta,
about 12.3 degrees 2 theta, and about 13.9 degrees 2 theta. The
Form II X-ray powder diffraction pattern typically lacks peaks at
about 7.2 degrees 2 theta and at about 11.2 degrees 2 theta. Table
1 shows a comparison of prominent X-ray powder diffraction peaks
for Form I and Form II.
[0281] FIG. 7 shows typical Fourier transform infrared (FTIR)
spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot (b)) for compound
41. Preferably the Form II crystalline form has the infrared (1R)
spectrum shown in FIG. 7, plot (b). Typically, Form II has an IR
spectrum with a peak at about 3245 cm.sup.-1 to about 3255
cm.sup.-1. Preferably, Form II also has an IR peak at about 1600
cm.sup.-1. Also preferably, Form II has an IR peak at about 1288
cm.sup.-1. Table 2 shows a comparison of prominent FTIR peaks for
Form I and Form II.
[0282] FIG. 8 shows typical solid state carbon-13 nuclear magnetic
resonance (NMR) spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot
(b)) of compound 41. Preferably the Form II crystalline form has
the solid state carbon-13 NMR spectrum shown in FIG. 8, plot (b).
Typically, Form II has a solid state carbon-13 NMR spectrum with
peaks at about 142.3 ppm, about 137.2 ppm, and about 125.4 ppm.
Table 3 shows a comparison of prominent solid state carbon-13 NMR
peaks for Form I and Form II.
[0283] FIG. 9 shows typical differential scanning calorimetry
profiles for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot(b)) of compound
41.
[0284] A dry sample of the crystalline form having a melting point
or a decomposition point of about 278.degree. C. to about
285.degree. C. (i.e., Form II) typically gains less than about 1%
of its own weight when equilibrated under 80% relative humidity
(RH) air at 25.degree. C. Such a crystalline form is essentially
nonhygroscopic. For example, when a sample of Form II crystalline
form of compound 41 or an enantiomer thereof is dried at
essentially 0% RH at about 25.degree. C. under a purge of
essentially dry nitrogen until the sample exhibits essentially no
weight change as a function of time, the sample gains less than 1%
of its own weight when it is then equilibrated under about 80% RH
air at about 25.degree. C. For the present purposes, the term
"essentially 0% RH" means less than about 1% RH. The term
"equilibrated" means that the change in weight of a sample over
time at a given relative humidity is less than 0.0003%
((dm/dt)/m.sub.0.times.100, where m is mass in mg, m.sub.0 is
initial mass, and t is time in minutes).
[0285] The present invention also provides a crystalline form of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 71
wherein the crystalline form is produced by crystallizing the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a solvent comprising methyl
ethyl ketone. Preferably in the crystalline form of the present
invention, compound 71 has a (4R,5R) absolute configuration; i.e.,
compound 41. Alternatively, a crystal form of the present invention
can be prepared by crystallizing the (4S,5S)-enantiomer of compound
71 from a solvent comprising methyl ethyl ketone.
[0286] The present invention provides a method of preparing the
crystalline form of the present invention. Particularly, the
present invention provides a method for the preparation of a
crystalline form of a tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the
structure of Formula 63 83
[0287] wherein the method comprises crystallizing the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound from a solvent comprising methyl
ethyl ketone, and wherein:
[0288] R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 independently are C.sub.1 to about
C.sub.20 hydrocarbyl;
[0289] R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 independently are selected
from the group consisting of H and C.sub.1 to about C.sub.20
hydrocarbyl, wherein optionally one or more carbon atom of the
hydrocarbyl is replaced by O, N, or S, and wherein optionally two
or more of R.sup.3, R.sup.4, and R.sup.5 taken together with the
atom to which they are attached form a cyclic structure;
[0290] R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of H,
hydrocarbyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, ammoniumalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, 3 heterocyclyl,
heteroaryl, quaternary heterocycle, quaternary heteroaryl,
OR.sup.3, NR.sup.3R.sup.4, N.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.- sup.5A.sup.-,
SR.sup.3, S(O)R.sup.3, SO.sub.2R.sup.3, SO.sub.3R.sup.3, oxo,
CO.sub.2R.sup.3, CN, halogen, NCO, CONR.sup.3R.sup.4, SO.sub.2OM,
SO.sub.2NR.sup.3R.sup.4, PO(OR.sup.23)OR.sup.24,
P.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4R.s- up.5A.sup.-,
S.sup.+R.sup.3R.sup.4A.sup.-, and C(O)OM;
[0291] R.sup.23 and R.sup.24 are independently selected from the
substituents constituting R.sup.3 and M;
[0292] n is a number from 0 to 4;
[0293] A.sup.- and Q.sup.- independently are pharmaceutically
acceptable anions; and
[0294] M is a pharmaceutically acceptable cation.
[0295] Preferably in the method of the present invention the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound has the structure of Formula 64,
and more preferably it has the structure of compound 41. 84
[0296] The present invention also provides a crystal form of
compound 41 or an enantiomer thereof wherein the crystalline form
is produced by crystallizing the tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound
or the enantiomer from a solvent comprising a ketone solvent.
Preferably the ketone solvent is methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, or
methyl isobutyl ketone. More preferably the ketone is methyl ethyl
ketone.
[0297] Another aspect of the present invention embodies a method
for the preparation of Form II ("product crystal form") of compound
41 from Form I ("initial crystal form") of compound 41 wherein the
method comprises applying heat to Form I. Accordingly, the present
invention provides a method for the preparation of a Form II of a
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound having the compound structure of
Formula 41 wherein Form II has a melting point or a decomposition
point of about 278.degree. C. to about 285.degree. C., wherein the
method comprises applying heat to Form I of the
tetrahydrobenzothiepine compound wherein Form I has a melting point
or a decomposition point of about 220.degree. C. to about
235.degree. C., thereby forming Form II of compound 41.
Conveniently in the present method Form I is heated to a
temperature from about 20.degree. C. to about 150.degree. C.,
preferably about 50.degree. C. to about 125.degree. C., and more
preferably about 60.degree. C. to about 1001C. The method can
further comprise a cooling step after the step in which Form I is
heated. If desired, the conversion of Form I into Form II can be
performed in the presence of a solvent. For example, the conversion
can be performed on a slurry of Form I mixed with a solvent. The
solvent can comprise essentially any convenient solvent. Preferably
the solvent comprises a ketone, and more preferably the ketone is
methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, or methyl isobutyl ketone. More
preferably still the ketone is methyl ethyl ketone. However, the
conversion can if desired be performed in acetone. Alternatively,
the conversion can be performed in methyl isobutyl ketone.
[0298] Although the discussion and examples of this application
illustrate the preparation of tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxides having
a para-substituted phenyl group at the 5-position of the
benzothiepine ring, tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxides having a
meta-substituted phenyl group at the 5-position can be prepared in
a similar manner by selection of the proper starting materials. For
example, use of a meta-substituted phenyl analog of a compound of
Formula 7 in the applicable processes of the present application
would yield the corresponding tetrahydrobenzothiepine oxide having
a meta-substituted phenyl group at the 5position. The preparation
of selected suitable starting materials is disclosed in U.S. Pat.
No. 5,994,391 (such as described in Examples 1398a, 1400, 1425,
1426 and 1426a).
[0299] c. Detailed Preparative Methods
[0300] The starting materials for use in the methods of preparation
of the invention are known or can be prepared by conventional
methods known to a skilled person or in an analogous manner to
processes described in the art.
[0301] Generally, the process methods of the present invention can
be performed as follows.
EXAMPLE 1
Preparation of 1-chloro-2-(4-methoxyphenyl)methyl-4-nitrobenzene,
33
[0302] 85
[0303] Step A. Preparation of
2-chloro-5-nitrophenyl-4'-methoxyphenyl ketone, 34.
[0304] Method 1. 86
[0305] In an inert atmosphere, weigh out 68.3 g of phosphorus
pentachloride (0.328 mole, Aldrich) into a 2-necked 500 mL round
bottom flask. Fit the flask with a N.sub.2 inlet adapter and suba
seal. Remove from the inert atmosphere and begin N.sub.2 purge. Add
50 mL of anhydrous chlorobenzene (Aldrich) to the PCl.sub.5 via
syringe and begin stirring with a magnetic stir bar.
[0306] Weigh out 60 g of 2-chloro-5-nitrobenzoic acid (0.298 mole,
Aldrich). Slowly add the 2-chloro-5-nitrobenzoic acid to the
chlorobenzene solution while under N.sub.2 purge. Stir at room
temperature overnight. After stirring at room temperature for about
20 hrs, place in an oil bath and heat at 50.degree. C. for 1 hr.
Remove chlorobenzene under high vacuum. Wash the residue with
anhydrous hexane. Dry the acid chloride (wt=61.95 g). Store in
inert and dry atmosphere.
[0307] In an inert atmosphere, dissolve the acid chloride in 105 mL
of anhydrous anisole (0.97 mole, Aldrich). Place solution in a
2-neck 500 mL round bottom flask.
[0308] Weigh out 45.1 g of aluminum trichloride (0.34 moles,
Aldrich) and place in a solid addition funnel. Fit the reaction
flask with an addition funnel and a N.sub.2 inlet adapter. Remove
from inert atmosphere. Chill the reaction solution with an ice bath
an begin the N.sub.2 purge. Slowly add the AlCl.sub.3 to the
chilled solution. After addition is complete, allow to warn to room
temperature. Stir overnight.
[0309] Quench the reaction by pouring into a solution of 300 mL 1N
HCl and ice. Stir for 15 min. Extract twice with ether. Combine the
organic layers and extract twice with 2% NaOH, then twice with
deionized H.sub.2O. Dry over MgSO.sub.4, filter, and rotovap to
dryness. Remove the anisole under high vacuum. Crystallize the
product from 90% ethanol/10% ethyl acetate. Dry on a vacuum line.
Wt=35.2 g. yield 41%. Mass spec (m/z=292).
[0310] Method 2.
[0311] Change 230 kg of 2-chloro-5-nitrobenzoic acid (CNBA) to a
clean dry reactor flushed with N.sub.2. Seal the reactor and flush
with N.sub.2. To the reactor charge 460 kg of anisole. Start
agitation and heat the mixture to 90.degree. C., dissolving most of
the CNBA. To the reactor charge 785 kg of polyphosphoric acid
(PPA). PPA containers are warmed in a hot box (70.degree. C.) prior
to charging in order to lower viscosity. Two phases result. The
upper phase contains the majority of the CNBA and anisole. The
lower phase contains most of the PPA. The reaction conditions are
maintained for 5 hr at which time sampling begins to determine
residual CNBA. Analysis of samples is by gas chromatography. The
reaction is quenched when 1.0% residual CNBA is achieved. The
reaction is quenched into 796 kg H.sub.2O. The temperature of the
quenched mass is adjusted to 60.degree. C. and maintained at this
temperature until isolation. Agitation is stopped and the phases
are split. The lower spent acid phase is sent to waste disposal.
The upper product phase is washed with 18 kg of sodium bicarbonate
in 203 kg of water, then washed with 114 kg of potable water.
Agitation is stopped and the phases are split. The upper aqueous
phase is sent to waste disposal. The lower product phase is cooled
to about 0.degree. C. and 312 kg of heptane is added. A mixture of
ortho- and para-substituted product (total 10 kg) precipitates out
of solution and is recovered by pressure filtration. To the product
phase is added another 134 kg of heptane causing another 317 kg of
a mixture of ortho- and para-substituted product to precipitate.
The precipitate is recovered by pressure filtration. The wetcake is
washed with heptane to remove residual anisole. The wetcake is
dried in a rotary vacuum dryer at 60.degree. C. Final yield of 34
is 65.1% (30.3% yield of the ortho-substituted product).
[0312] Step B. Preparation of
1-chloro-2-(4-methoxyphenyl)methyl-4-nitrobe- nzene, 33.
[0313] To a clean dry nitrogen purged 500 mL round bottom flask was
charged 60.0 g (0.206 moles) of 34. Trifluoroacetic acid (100
grams, ca. 67 mL) was added to the reactor and the resulting
suspension was heated to 30.degree. C. to give a homogeneous wine
colored solution. Next, 71.0 g (0.611 moles) of triethylsilane was
placed in an addition funnel and 1.7 g (0.011 moles) of
trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (triflic acid) was added to reactor.
The color changed from burgundy to greenish brown. Triethylsilane
was added dropwise to the solution at 30.degree. C. The batch color
changed to a grass green and an exothermic reaction ensued. The
exotherm was allowed to raise the batch temperature to 45.degree.
C. with minimal cooling in a water bath. The reaction temperature
was controlled between 45-50.degree. C. for the duration of
addition. Addition of triethylsilane was complete in 1 hour. The
batch color became greenish brown at completion. The batch was
stirred for three more hours at 40.degree. C., then allowed to
cool. When the batch temperature reached ca. 30.degree. C., product
started to crystallize. The batch was further cooled to 1-2.degree.
C. in a water/ice bath, and after stirring for another half hour at
1-2.degree. C., the slurry was filtered. The crystalline solid was
washed with two 60 mL portions of hexane, the first as a
displacement wash and the second as a reslurry on the filter. The
solids were vacuum filtered until dry on the filter under a stream
of nitrogen and the solids were then transferred to a clean
container. A total of 49.9 grams of material was isolated. Mp
87.5-90.5.degree. C. and HNMR identical with known samples of 33.
GC (HP-5 25 meter column, 1 mL N.sub.2/min at 100.degree. C., FID
detection at 300.degree. C., split 50:1) of the product showed
homogeneous material. The isolated yield was 88% of 33.
EXAMPLE 2
Preparation of 2,2-dibutyl-1,3-propanediol, 54
[0314] 87
[0315] (This method is similar to that described in U.S. Pat. No.
5,994,391, Example Corresponding to Scheme XI, Step 1, column 264.)
Lithium aluminum hydride (662 ml, 1.2 equivalents, 0.66 mol) in 662
mL of IM THF was added dropwise to a stirred solution of
dibutyl-diethylmalonate (150 g, 0.55 mol) (Aldrich) in dry THF (700
ml) while maintaining the temperature of the reaction mixture at
between about -20?C to about 0?C using an acetone/dry ice bath. The
reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature overnight.
The reaction was cooled to -20?C and 40 ml of water, 80 ml of 10%
NaOH and 80 ml of water were successively added dropwise. The
resulting suspension was filtered. The filtrate was dried over
sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to give 98.4 g (yield
95%) of the diol as an oil. Proton NMR, carbon NMR and MS confirmed
the product.
[0316] Alternate reducing agents that will be useful in this
preparation of compound 54 include diisobutylaluminum hydride
(DIBAL-H) or sodium bis(2-methoxyethyxy)aluminum hydride (for
example, Red-Al supplied by Aldrich).
EXAMPLE 3
Preparation of 1-bromo-2-butyl-2-(hydroxymethyl)hexane, 52
[0317] 88
[0318] A 250 mL 3-necked round-bottomed flask was fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple
connected to a J-Kem temperature controller and a thermocouple
connected to analog data acquisition software, and a heating
mantle. The flask was purged with nitrogen and charged with 20
grams of 54. To this was added 57 grams of a 30 wt. % solution of
HBr in acetic acid. The mixture was heated to 80.degree. C. for 4
hrs. The solvents were distilled off to a pot temperature of
125.degree. C. over 20 minutes. This removes most of the residual
HBr. The mixture was cooled to 80.degree. C. and 100 mL of Ethanol
2B (source: Aaper) was added at once. Next 1.0 mL of concentrated
sulfuric acid was added. The solvent was distilled off (10 to 15 ml
solvent at 79-80.degree. C.). And the mixture was refluxed for 2 h.
An additional 10 to 15 ml of solvent was distilled off and the
mixture was again held at reflux temperature for 2 h. Further
solvent was distilled off to a pot temperature of 125.degree. C.
and then the flask contents were cooled to 25.0.degree. C. To the
flask was added 100 mL of ethyl acetate and 100 mL of 2.5N sodium
hydroxide. The mixture was agitated for 15 minutes and the aqueous
layer was separated. Another 100 mL of water was added to the pot
and the contents were agitated 15 minutes. The aqueous layer was
separated and solvent was distilled off to a pot temperature of
125.degree. C. During this process water is removed by azeotropic
distillation with ethyl acetate. The product was concentrated under
reduced pressure to afford 26.8 g of a brown oil containing the
product 52 (96.81% by GC: HP1 column; initial temp. 50.degree. C.,
hold for 2.5 min, Ramp 10.degree. C./min to ending temp.
275.degree. C., final time 15 min).
Example 3a
Alternate Preparation of 1-bromo-2-butyl-2-(hydroxymethyl)hexane,
52
[0319] A 250 mL 3-necked round-bottomed flask is fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple
connected to a J-Kem temperature controller and a thermocouple
connected to analog data acquisition software, and a heating
mantle. The flask is purged with nitrogen and charged with 20 grams
of 54. To this is added 57 grams of a 30 wt. % solution of HBr in
acetic acid. The mixture is heated to 80.degree. C. for 4 hrs. The
solvents are vacuum distilled off to a pot temperature of
90.degree. C. over 20 minutes. This removes most of the residual
HBr. The mixture is cooled to 80.degree. C. and 100 mL of Ethanol
2B (source: Aaper) is added at once. Next 1.0 mL of concentrated
sulfuric acid is added. The solvent is distilled off (10 to 15 ml
solvent at 79-80.degree. C.). And the mixture is refluxed for 2 h.
An additional 10 to 15 ml of solvent is distilled off and the
mixture is again held at reflux temperature for 2 h. Further
solvent is distilled off to a pot temperature of 85.degree. C. and
then the flask contents are cooled to 25.0.degree. C. To the flask
is added 100 mL of ethyl acetate and 100 mL of 2.5N sodium
hydroxide. The mixture is agitated for 15 minutes and the aqueous
layer is separated. Another 100 mL of water is added to the pot and
the contents are agitated 15 minutes. The aqueous layer is
separated and solvent is distilled off to a pot temperature of
85.degree. C. During this process water is removed by azeotropic
distillation with ethyl acetate. The material is concentrated under
reduced pressure to afford the product 52.
EXAMPLE 4
Preparation of 2-(bromomethyl)-2-butylhexanal, 53
[0320] 89
[0321] A 500 mL 3-necked round-bottom flask was fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple
connected to a J-Kem temperature controller and a thermocouple
connected to analog data acquisition software, and a heating
mantle. The flask was purged with nitrogen gas and charged with
26.0 grams of 52 and 15.6 grams of triethylamine. In a 250 ml flask
was slurried 37.6 grams of sulfur trioxide-pyridine in 50 mL of
DMSO. The DMSO slurry was added to the round-bottom flask by
addition funnel over 15 min. The addition temperature started at
22.degree. C. and reached a maximum of 41.0.degree. C. (Addition of
the slurry at temperatures below 18.0.degree. C. will result in a
very slow reaction, building up sulfur trioxide with will react
rapidly when the temperature rises above 25.degree. C.) The mixture
was stirred for 15 minutes. To the mixture was added 100 mL of 2.5M
HCl over 5 minutes. The temperature was maintained below 35.degree.
C. Next, 100 mL of ethyl acetate was added and the mixture was
stirred 15 minutes. The mixture was then cooled to ambient and the
aqueous layer was separated. To the pot was added 100 mL of water
and the mixture was agitated for 15 minutes. The aqueous layer was
separated. The solvent was distilled to a pot temperature of
115.degree. C. and the remaining material was concentrated under
reduce pressure to afford 21.8 g of a brown oil containing the
product 53 (95.1% by GC: HP1 column; initial temp. 50.degree. C.,
hold for 2.5 min, Ramp 10.degree. C./min to ending temp.
275.degree. C., final time 15 min).
Example 4a
Alternate Preparation and Purification of
2-(Bromomethyl)-2-butylhexanal, 53
[0322] a. Preparation of Compound 52
[0323] To the reactor is charged 2,2-dibutyl-1,3-propanediol
followed by 30 wt % HBr in acetic acid. The vessel is sealed and
heated at an internal temperature of ca. 80.degree. C. and held for
a period of ca. 7 hours, pressure maintained below 25 psia. A GC of
the reaction mixture is taken to determine reaction completion
(i.e., conversion of 2,2-dibutyl-1,3-propanediol into
3-acetoxy-2,2-dibutyl-1-propanol). If the reaction is not complete
at this point, the mixture may be heated for an additional period
of time to complete the conversion. Acetic acid/HBr is then removed
using house vacuum (ca. 25 mmHg) up to a maximum internal
temperature of ca. 90.degree. C. Ethanol is then added followed by
sulfuric acid. A portion of the ethanol is removed (ca. one-quarter
of the ethanol added) via atmospheric distillation. Ethanol is then
added back (ca. the amount removed during the distillation) to the
reactor containing the 3-acetoxy-2,2-dibutyl-1propanol and the
contents are heated to reflux (ca. 80.degree. C. with a jacket
temperature of 95.degree. C.) and then held at reflux for ca. 8
hours. Ethanol is then removed via atmospheric distillation up to a
maximum internal temperature of 85.degree. C., using a jacket
temperature of 95.degree. C. A GC is taken to determine reaction
completion (i.e., conversion of 3-acetoxy-2,2-dibutyl-1-propanol to
compound 52). If the reaction is not complete, ethanol is added
back to the reactor and the contents are heated to reflux and then
held at reflux for an additional 4 hours (ca. 80.degree. C., with a
jacket of 95.degree. C.). Ethanol is then removed via atmospheric
distillation up to a maximum internal temperature of 85.degree. C.,
using a jacket temperature of 95.degree. C. A GC is taken to
determine reaction completion (i.e., conversion of
3-acetoxy-2,2-dibutyl-1-propanol to compound 52). Once the reaction
is deemed to be complete, the remaining ethanol is removed via
atmospheric distillation up to a maximum internal temperature of
125.degree. C. Methyl t-butyl ether is then added followed by a 5%
sodium bicarbonate solution. The layers are separated, the aqueous
layer is extracted once with MTBE, the organic extracts-are
combined, washed once with water, dried over MgSO.sub.4, and
concentrated under house vacuum (ca. 25 mmHg) to a maximum internal
temperature of 60.degree. C. The resultant oil is stored in the
cooler until it is needed for further processing.
[0324] b. Preparation of Compound 53.
[0325] Methyl sulfoxide is charged to the reactor followed by
compound 52 and triethylamine. Pyridine-sulfur trioxide complex is
then added portion-wise to the reactor while maintaining an
internal temperature of <35.degree. C. Once the pyridine-sulfur
trioxide complex addition is complete, a GC of the reaction mixture
is taken to determine reaction completion (i.e., conversion of 52
into 53). If the reaction is not complete at this point, the
mixture may be stirred for an additional period of time to complete
the conversion. The reaction is quenched with an 11 wt % aqueous
HCl solution. Ethyl acetate is added and the layers are separated,
the aqueous layer is extracted once with ethyl acetate, the organic
extracts are combined, washed once with water, dried over
MgSO.sub.4, and concentrated under house vacuum (ca. 25 mm/Hg) to a
maximum internal temperature of 30.degree. C. The resultant oil is
stored in the cooler until it is needed for further processing.
[0326] c. Alternate Preparation of Compound 53.
[0327] Compound 52 and methylene chloride are charged to the
reactor followed by TEMPO. The solution is cooled to ca.
0-5.degree. C. Potassium bromide and sodium bicarbonate are
dissolved in a separate reactor and added to the solution of 52 and
TEMPO at 0-5.degree. C. The biphasic mixture is cooled to
0-5.degree. C. and sodium hypochlorite is added at such a rate to
maintain an internal temperature of 0-5.degree. C. When the add is
complete a GC of the reaction mixture is performed to determine
reaction completion. If the reaction is not complete (>1% 52
remaining), additional sodium hypochlorite may be added to drive
the reaction to completion. Immediately after the reaction is
determined to be complete, an aqueous solution of sodium sulfite is
added to quench the remaining sodium hypochlorite. The layers are
separated, the aqueous layer is back-extracted with methylene
chloride, the combined organic fractions are washed and dried over
sodium sulfate. Compound 53 is then concentrated via a vacuum
distillation, up to a maximum internal temperature of ca.
30.degree. C. The crude aldehyde is stored in the cooler until it
is required for further processing.
[0328] d. Purification of Compound 53.
[0329] A Wiped Film Evaporated (WFE) apparatus is set up with the
following conditions: evaporator temperature of 90.degree. C.,
vacuum of ca. 0.2 mmHg and a wiper speed of 800 rpm's. The crude
compound 53 is fed at a rate of 1.0-1.5 kilograms of crude per
hour. The approximate ratio of product to residue during
distillation is 90:10.
EXAMPLE 5
Preparation of
1-(2,2-dibutyl-S,S-dioxido-3-oxopropylthio)-2-((4methoxyphe-
nyl)methyl)-4-nitrobenzene, 30
[0330] 90
[0331] A 1000 mL 4 neck jacketed Ace flask was fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple, four
internal baffles and a 28 mm Teflon turbine agitator. The flask was
purged with nitrogen and charged with 75.0 grams of 33. Next, the
flask was charged with 315.0 grams of dimethylacetamide (DMAC),
agitation was started and the mixture was heated to 30.degree. C.
Sodium sulfide (39.2 grams) was dissolved in 90 ml water in a
separate flask. The aqueous sodium sulfide solution was charged
into the flask over a 25 minute period. Temperature reached
37.degree. C. at completion of addition. The solution turned dark
red immediately and appeared to form a small amount of foam-like
globules that adhered to the wall of the reactor. The temperature
was held for two hrs at 40.degree. C. To the flask was charged 77.9
grams of 53 all at once. The reaction mixture was heated to
65.degree. C. and held for 2 hrs. Next 270 ml water was added at
65.degree. C. The mixture was agitated 15 minutes. To the flask was
then charge 315 ml of benzotrifluoride and the mixture was agitated
15 minutes. The aqueous layer was separated at 50.degree. C. The
organic layer was washed with 315 ml of 3% sodium chloride
solution. The aqueous layer was separated at 50.degree. C. The
solvent was distilled to a pot temperature of 63.degree. C. at 195
to 200 mmHg. The flask contents were cooled to 60.degree. C. and to
it was charged 87.7 grams of trimethyl orthoformate, and 5.2 grams
of p-toluenesulfonic acid dissolved in 164.1 mL of methanol. The
mixture was heated to reflux, 60 to 65.degree. C. for 2 hours. The
solvent was distilled to a pot temperature of 63.degree. C. at 195
to 200 mmHg to remove methanol and methylformate. The flask was
then charged with 252 ml benzotrifluoride and then cooled to
15.degree. C. Next 22.2 grams sodium acetate as a slurry in 30 ml
water was added to the flask. The flask was then charged with 256.7
grams of commercial peracetic acid (nominally 30-35% assay) over 20
minutes, starting at 15.degree. C. and allowing the exotherm to
reach 30 to 35.degree. C. The addition was slow at first to control
initial exotherm. After the first equivalent was charged the
exotherm subsided. The mixture was heated to 30.degree. C. and held
for 3 hours. The aqueous layer was separated at 30.degree. C. The
organic layer was washed with 315 ml 6% sodium sulfite. The aqueous
layer was separated. The flask was then charged with 40% by wt.
sulfuric acid and heated to 75.degree. C. for 2 hrs. The aqueous
layer was separated from the bottom at 40 to 50.degree. C. To the
flask was added 315 ml saturated sodium bicarbonate and the
contents were stirred for 15 minutes. The aqueous layer was
separated. The solvent was distilled to a reactor temperature of
63.degree. C. at 195 to 200 mmHg. Next, 600 ml isopropyl alcohol
was charged over 10 minutes and the temperature was maintained at
50.degree. C. The reactor was cooled to 38.degree. C. and held for
1 hour. (The product may oil slightly at first then crystallize
during the hold period. If product oils out at 38.degree. C. or
does not crystallize it should be seeded to promote crystallization
before cooling.) The reactor was cooled to 15.degree. C. over 30
minutes then held for 60 minutes. The solids were filtered and
dried to yield 102.1 grams of a crystalline yellow solid. Wash with
150 ml 10.degree. C. IPA. Analysis by HPLC (Zorbax RX-C8 column,
0.1% aq. TFA/acetonitrile gradient mobile phase, UV detection at
225 nm) showed 97.7% by weight of 30, 79.4% isolated molar
corrected yield.
Example 5a
Alternate Preparation of
1-(2,2-dibutyl-S,S-dioxido-3-oxopropylthio)-2-((4-
methoxyphenyl)methyl)-4-nitrobenzene, 30
[0332] Step 1. Preparation of Sulfide Aldehyde Compound 69. 91
[0333] A 1000 mL 4 neck jacketed Ace reator is fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, nitrogen inlet, additional funnel, a
thermocouple, four internal baffles, and a 28 mm Teflon turbine
agitator. The flask is purged with nitrogen gas and charged with
145 g of compound 33 and 609 mL of N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC).
Agitation is started and the mixture is heated to 30.degree. C. In
a separate flask 72.3 g of Na.sub.2S (Spectrum) is dissolved in
166.3 mL of water. The aqueous Na.sub.2S is charged to the flask
over a period of about 90 minutes. Addition rate should be adjusted
to maintain the reaction temperature below 35.degree. C. The
mixture is stirred at 35.degree. C. for 2 hours and then 150.7 g of
compound 53 is added all at once. The mixture is heated to
70.degree. C. and held for 2 hours. To the mixture is adjusted to
50.degree. C., to it is added 442.7 mL water and the mixture is
agitated for 15 minutes. To the reactor is then charged 609 mL of
benzotrifluoride followed by 15 minutes of agitation. The aqueous
layer is separated at 50.degree. C. The organic layer is washed
with 3% aq. NaCl. The aqueous layer is separated at 50.degree. C.
The organic layer contains compound 69. The organic layer is stable
and can be held indefinitely.
[0334] Step 2. Preparation of Compound 70. 92
[0335] The solvent is distilled at about 63.degree. C. to
66.degree. C. and 195 to 200 mmHg from the organic layer resulting
from Step 1 until a third to a half of the benzotrifluoride volume
is distilled. The mixture is cooled to about 60.degree. C. and
charged with 169.6 g of trimethylorthoformate and about 10 g of
p-toluenesulfonic acid dissolved in 317.2 mL of methanol. (Note:
alternate orthoformates, for example triethylorthoformate, can be
used in place of trimethylorthoformate to obtain other acetals.)
The reactor is fitted with a condenser and a distillation head. The
mixture is heated to boiling and from it is distilled 5 mL of
methanol to remove residual water from the condenser and the
mixture is held at reflux at 60.degree. C. to 65.degree. C. for
about 2 hours. Solvent is then distilled to a pot temperature of
60.degree. C. to 66.degree. C. at 195 to 200 mm Hg to remove
methanol and methylformate. To the mixture is added 355.4 mL
benzotrifluoride and the mixture is cooled to 15.degree. C. To the
reactor is charged 32.1 g sodium acetate slurried in 77.2 mL water.
The reaction is held for 72 hours. To the reactor is then charged
340.4 g of peracetic acid over a 2 hour period starting at
15.degree. C. Addition was adjusted to keep the temperature at or
below 20.degree. C. The mixture was then heated to 25.degree. C.
for 4 hours. The aqueous (top) layer was separated at 25.degree. C.
and the organic layer was washed with 190 mL of 10% sodium sulfite.
The organic layer contains compound 70 and can be stored
indefinitely.
[0336] Step 3. Preparation of Compound 30.
[0337] To the organic layer of Step 2 is added 383.8 g of
concentrated sulfuric acid. The mixture is heated at 75.degree. C.
for 2 hours and the aqueous (bottom) layer is separated at 40 to
50.degree. C. To the reactor is charged 609 mL of 10% sodium
bicarbonate and the mixture is stirred for 15 minutes. The aqueous
(top) layer is separated. Solvent is distilled from the organic
layer at 63 to 66.degree. C. at 195 to 200 mm Hg. To the reactor is
charged 1160 mL of isopropyl alcohol over 10 minutes at 50.degree.
C. The reactor is cooled to 38.degree. C. and held for 1 hour. Some
crystallization occurs. The reactor is cooled to 15.degree. C. over
30 minutes and held for 120 minutes, causing further
crystallization of 30. The crystals are filtered and dried to yield
200.0 g of a crystalline yellow solid. The crystals of 30 are
washed with 290 mL of 10.degree. C. isopropyl alcohol.
EXAMPLE 6
Preparation of
1-(2,2-dibutyl-S,S-dioxido-3-oxopropylthio)-2-((4methoxyphe-
nyl)methyl)-4-dimethylaminobenzene, 29
[0338] 93
[0339] A 300 ml autoclave was fitted with a Stirmix hollow shaft
gas mixing agitator, an automatic cooling and heating temperature
control, and an in-reactor sampling line with sintered metal
filter. At 20.degree. C. the autoclave was charged with 15.0 grams
of 30, 2.5 grams of Pd/C catalyst, 60 grams of ethanol, 10.0 grams
of formaldehyde (36% aqueous solution), and 0.55 grams of
concentrated sulfuric acid. The reactor was closed and pressurized
the reactor to 60 psig (515 kPa) with nitrogen to check for
leakage. The pressure was then reduced to 1-2 psig (108-115 kPa).
The purge was repeated three times. The autoclave was then
pressurized with H.sub.2 to 60 psig (515 kPa) while the reactor
temperature was held at 22.degree. C. The agitator was started and
set to 800-1000 rpm and the reactor temperature control is set at
30-40.degree. C. When the cooling capacity was not enough to
control the temperature, the agitator rpm or the reactor pressure
was reduced to maintain the set temperature. After about 45 minutes
when the heat release was slowing down (about 70% of hydrogen usage
was reacted), the temperature was raised to 60.degree. C. Hydrogen
was then released and the autoclave was purged with nitrogen three
times. The content of the reactor was pressure filtered through a
sintered metal filter at 60.degree. C. The filtrate was stirred to
cool to the room temperature over 1-2 hours and 50 grams of water
was added over 1 hour. The mixture was stirred slowly at 4.degree.
C. overnight and filtered through a Buche type filter. The cake was
air dried to give 13.0 grams of 29 with 99+% assay. The isolated
yield was 89%.
EXAMPLE 7
5 Preparation of
syn-3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-1,1-dioxido-4-hydroxy-5-
-(4-methoxyphenyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrobenzothiepine, syn-24
[0340] 94
[0341] A 250 ml round bottom glass reactor fitted with mechanical
agitator and a heating/cooling bath was purged with nitrogen.
Forty-five grams of potassium t-butoxide/THF solution were charged
to the reactor and agitation was started. In a separate container
18 grams of 29 was dissolved in 25 grams of THF. The 29/THF
solution was charged into the reactor through a addition funnel
over about 2.0 hours. The reactor temperature was controlled
between about 16-20.degree. C. Salt precipitated after about half
of 29 was added. The slurry was stirred at 16-20.degree. C. for an
hour. The reaction was quenched with 54 grams of 7.4% ammonium
chloride aqueous solution over a period of about 30 minutes while
keeping the reactor temperature at 16-24.degree. C. The mixture was
gently stirred until all salt is dissolved (about 10 minutes).
Agitation was stopped and the phases were allowed to separate. The
aqueous layer was drained. The organic layer was charged with 50 ml
water and 25 grams of isopropyl alcohol. The agitator was started
and crystallization was allowed to take place. The THF was
distilled under the ambient pressure, with b.p. from 60 to
65.degree. C. and pot temperature from 70 to 77.degree. C. The
crystals dissolved as the pot gets heated and reappeared when the
THF started to distill. After distillation was complete, the slurry
was slowly cooled to 4.degree. C. over 2-3 hours and stirred slowly
for several hours. The slurry was filtered with a 150 ml Buche
filter and the cake was washed with 10 grams of cold 2:1
water/isopropyl alcohol solution. Filtration was complete in about
5 minutes. The cake was air dried to give 16.7 grams of syn-24 with
99+% assay and a 50/50 mixture of R,R and S,S isomers.
EXAMPLE 8a.
Conditions for Optical Resolution of Compound (4R,5R)-24
[0342] 95
[0343] The following simulated moving bed chromatography (SMB)
conditions are used to separate the (4R,5R) and (4S,5S) enantiomers
of compound syn-24.
2 Column (CSP): Daicel Chiralpak AS Mobile Phase: acetonitrile
(100%) Column Length: 11 cm (9 cm for column 6) Column I.D.: 20.2
cm Number of Columns: 6 columns Feed Concentration: 39 grams/liter
Eluent Flowrate: 182 L/hour Feed Flowrate: 55 L/hour Extract
Flowrate: 129.4 L/hour Raffinate Flowrate: 107.8 L/hour Recycling
Flowrate: 480.3 L/hour Period: 0.6 minute Temperature: ambient
[0344] SMB Performance:
[0345] Less retained enantiomer purity (%): 92.8%
[0346] Less retained enantiomer concentration: 10 g/L
[0347] More retained enantiomer recovery yield (%): 99.3%
[0348] More retained enantiomer concentration: 7 g/L
Example 8b
Alternate Conditions for Optical Resolution of Compound
(4R,5R)-24
[0349] The following simulated moving bed chromatography (SMB)
conditions are used to separate the (4R,5R) and (4S,5S) enantiomers
of compound syn-24.
3 Column (CSP): di-methyl phenyl derivative of tartaric acid
(Kromasil DMB) Mobile Phase: toluene/methyl tert-butyl ether
(70/30) Column Length: 6.5 cm Column I.D.: 2.12 cm Number of
Columns: 8 columns Zones: 2-3-2-1 Feed Concentration: 6.4 weight
percent Eluent Flowrate: 20.3 g/minute Feed Flowrate: 0.7 g/minute
Extract Flowrate: 5.0 g/minute Raffinate Flowrate: 16.0 g/minute
Period: 8 minute Temperature: ambient
[0350] SMB Performance:
[0351] Less retained enantiomer purity (%): >98%
[0352] Less retained enantiomer recovery yield (%): >95%
Example 8c
Alternate Conditions for Optical Resolution of Compound
(4R,5R)-24
[0353] The following simulated moving bed chromatography (SMB)
conditions are used to separate the (4R,5R) and (4S,5S) enantiomers
of compound syn-24.
4 di-methyl phenyl derivative of tartaric Column (CSP): acid
(Kromasil DM3) Mobile Phase: toluene (100%) Column Length: 6.5 cm
Column I.D.: 2.12 cm Number of Columns: 8 columns Zones: 2-3-2-1
Feed Concentration: 64 weight percent Eluent Flowrate: 20.3
g/minute Feed Flowrate: 0.5 g/minute Extract Flowrate: 4.9 g/minute
Raffinate Flowrate: 15.9 g/minute Period: 8 minute Temperature:
ambient
[0354] SMB Performance:
[0355] Less retained enantiomer purity (%): >98%
[0356] Less retained enantiomer recovery yield (%): >95%
Example 8d
Racemization of Compound (4S,5S)-24
[0357] 96
[0358] A 250 mL round bottom glass reactor with mechanical agitator
and a heating/cooling bath is purged with nitrogen gas. In a flask,
18 g of (4S,5S)-24 (obtained as the more retained enantiomer in
Examples 8a-8c) is dissolved in 50 g of dry THF. This solution is
charged into the reactor and brought to about 23-25.degree. C. with
agitation. To the reactor is charged 45 g of potassium
t-butoxide/THF solution (1 M, Aldrich) through an addition funnel
over about 0.5 hour. A slurry forms. Stir the slurry at about
24-26.degree. C. for about 1-1.5 hours. The reaction is quenched
with 54 g of 7.5% aqueous ammonium chloride while keeping the
reactor temperature at about 23-26.degree. C. The first ca. 20% of
the ammonium chloride solution is charged slowly until the slurry
turns thin and the rest of the ammonium chloride solution is
charged over about 0.5 hour. The mixture is stirred gently until
all the salt is dissolved. The agitation is stopped and the phases
are allowed to separate. The aqueous layer is removed. To the
organic layer is charged 50 mL of water and 25 g of isopropyl
alcohol. The agitator is started and crystallization is allowed to
take place. THF is removed by distillation at ambient pressure. The
crystals dissolve as the pot warms and then reappear when the THF
starts to distill. The resulting slurry is cooled slowly to
4.degree. C. within 2-3 hours and slowly stirred for 1-2 hours. The
slurry is filtered with a 150 mL Buche filter and washed with 20 g
of 04.degree. C. isopropyl alcohol. The cake is air dried at about
50-60.degree. C. under vacuum to give 16.7 g of racemic 24.
EXAMPLE 9
Preparation of
(4R,5R)-3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-1,1-dioxido-4-hydroxy-
-5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrobenzothiepine,
(4R,5R)-28
[0359] 97
[0360] A 1000 mL 4 neck Reliance jacketed reactor flask was fitted
with a mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel,
condenser or distillation head with receiver, a thermocouple, and a
Teflon paddle agitator. The flask was purged with nitrogen gas and
was charged with 41.3 grams of (4R,5R)-24 and 18.7 grams of
methionine followed by 240 grams of methanesulfonic acid. The
mixture was heated to 75.degree. C. and stirred for 8 hrs. The
mixture was then cooled to 25.degree. C. and charged with 480 mL of
3-pentanone. The solution was homogeneous. Next, the flask was
charged with 320 mL of dilution water and was stirred for 15
minutes. The aqueous layer was separated and to the organic layer
was added 250 mL of saturated sodium bicarbonate. The mixture was
stirred for 15 minutes and the aqueous layer was separated. Solvent
was distilled to approximately one-half volume under vacuum at
50.degree. C. The flask was charged with 480 mL of toluene, forming
a clear solution. Approximately half the volume of solvent was
removed at 100 mmHg. The mixture was cooled to 10.degree. C. and
stirred overnight. Crystals were filtered and washed with 150 mL
cold toluene and allowed to dry under vacuum. Yielded 29.9g with a
96.4 wt % assay. The filtrate was concentrated and toluene was
added to give a second crop of 2.5 grams of crystals. A total of
32.1 g of dry off white crystalline (4R,5R)-28 was obtained.
Example 9a
Alternate Preparation of
(4R,5R)-3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-1,1-dioxido-
-4-hydroxy-5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrobenzothiepine,
(4R,5R)-28
[0361] A 1000 mL 4 neck Ace jacketed reactor flask is fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel, condenser
or distillation head with receiver, a thermocouple, and a Teflon
paddle agitator. The flask is purged with nitrogen gas and is
charged with 40.0 grams of (4R,5R)-24 and 17.8 grams of methionine
followed by 178.6 grams of methanesulfonic acid. The mixture is
heated to 80.degree. C. and stirred for 12 hrs. The mixture is then
cooled to 15.degree. C. and charged with 241.1 mL of water over 30
minutes. The reactor is then charged with 361.7 mL of 3-pentanone.
Next, the flask is stirred for 15 minutes. The aqueous layer is
separated and to the organic layer is added 361.7 mL of saturated
sodium bicarbonate. The mixture is stirred for 15 minutes and the
aqueous layer was separated. Solvent is distilled to approximately
one-half volume under vacuum at 50.degree. C. Crystals start to
form at this time. The flask is charged with 361.7 mL of toluene
and the mixture is cooled to 0.degree. C. Crystals are allowed to
form. Crystals are filtered and washed with 150 mL cold toluene and
allowed to dry under vacuum at 50.degree. C. Yield 34.1 g of
off-white crystalline (4R,5R)-28.
Example 9b
Alternate Preparation of
(4R,5R)-3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-1,1-dioxido-
-4-hydroxy-5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrobenzothiepine,
(4R,5R)-28
[0362] A first 45 L reactor is purged with nitrogen gas. To it is
charged 2.5 kg of (4R,5R)-24 followed by 1.1 kg of methionine and
11.1 kg of methanesulfonic acid. The reaction mixture is heated to
85.degree. C. with agitation for 7 hours. The reaction mixture is
then cooled to 5.degree. C. and 17.5 L of water is slowly charged
to the first reactor. The reaction temperature will reach about
57.degree. C. Next, 17.5 L of methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK) are
charged to the first reactor and the reaction mixture is stirred
for 30 minutes. The mixture is allowed to stand for 30 minutes and
the layers are separated. The aqueous phase is transferred to a
second 45 L reactor and 10 L of MIBK is charged to the second
reactor. The second reactor and its contents are stirred for 30
minutes and then allowed to stand for 30 minutes while the layers
separate. The organic phase is separated from the second reactor
and the two organic phases are combined in the first reactor. To
the first reactor is carefully charged 1.4 kg of aqueous sodium
bicarbonate. The mixture is stirred for 30 minutes and then allowed
to stand for 30 minutes. The phases are separated. If the pH of the
aqueous phase is less than 6 then a second bicarbonate wash is
performed. After the bicarbonate wash, 15 L of water is charged to
the first reactor and the mixture is heated to 40.degree. C. The
mixture is stirred for 30 minutes and then allowed to stand for 30
minutes. The phases are separated. The organic phase is
concentrated by vacuum distillation so that approximately 5 L of
MIBK remain in the concentrate. The distillation starts when the
batch temperature is at 35.degree. C. at 1 psia. The distillation
is complete when the batch temperature reaches about 47.8.degree.
C. The batch temperature is then adjusted to 45.degree. C. and 20 L
of heptane is charged to the product mixture over 20 minutes. The
resulting slurry is cooled to 20.degree. C. The product slurry is
filtered (10 micron cloth filter) and washed with 8 L of 20%
MIBK/heptane solution. The product is dried on the filter at
80.degree. C. for 21 hours under vacuum. A total of 2.16 kg of
white crystalline (4R,5R)-28 is isolated.
Example 9c
Batch Isolation of Compound (4R,5R)-28 (or Compound (4S,5S)-2) from
Acetonitrile Solution
[0363] A 1 L reactor is equipped with baffles and a 4-blade radial
flow turbine. The reactor is purged with 1L of nigrogen gas and
charged with 300 mL of water. The water is stirred at a minimum
rate of 300 rpm at 5.degree. C. The reactor is charged with 125-185
mL of (4R,5R)-28 in acetonitrile solution (20% w/w) at a rate of
1.4 mL/min. Upon addition, crystals start to form. After addition
of the acetonitrile solution, crystals are filtered through a
Buchner funnel. The cake is washed with 3 volumes of water and/or
followed by 1-2 volumes of ice cold isopropyl alcohol before
drying. Alternatively, this procedure can be used on an
acetonitrile solution of (4S,5S)-28 to isolate (4S,5S)-28.
Example 9d
Continuous Isolation of Compound (4R,5R)-28 (or Compound
(4S,5S)-28) from Acetonitrile Solution
[0364] A 1 L reactor is equipped with baffles and a 4-blade radial
flow turbine. The reactor is purged with 1L of nigrogen gas and
charged with 60 grams of water and 30 grams of acetonitrile. The
mixture is stirred at 300 rpm and 5.degree. C. Into the reactor are
fed 300 mL of water and 125 mL of 20% (w/w) (4R,5R)-28 in
acetonitrile solution at rates of 1.7 mL/min and 1 mL/min,
respectively. When the contents of the reactor reach 70-80% of the
volume of the reactor, the slurry can be drained to a filter down
to aminimum stirring level in the reactor and followed by more
feeding. Alternatively, the reactor can be drained continuously as
the feeds continue. The water/acetonitrile ratio can be in the
range of about 2:1 to about 3:1. Filtered cake can be handled as
described in Example 9c. Alternatively, this procedure can be used
on an acetonitrile solution of (4S,5S)-28 to isolate
(4S,5S)-28.
EXAMPLE 10
Preparation of 1-(chloromethyl)-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzene, 55
[0365] 98
[0366] A reaction flask fitted with a nitrogen inlet and outlet, a
reflux condenser, and a magnetic stirrer was purged with nitrogen.
The flask was charged with 25 g of 4-(chloromethyl)benzoic acid.
The flask was charged with 75 mL of THF at ambient temperature.
Stirring caused a suspension to form. An endothermic reaction
ensued in which the temperature of the reaction mixture dropped
22.degree. C. to 14.degree. C. To the reaction mixture 175 mL of
borane-THF adduct was added via a dropping funnel over about 30
minutes. During this exothermic addition, an ice-bath was used for
external cooling to keep the temperature below 30.degree. C. The
reaction mixture was stirred at 20.degree. C. for 1 h and it was
then cooled to 0.degree. C. The reaction mixture was quenched by
slow addition of 1M sulfuric acid. The resulting reaction mixture
was diluted with 150 mL of t-butyl methyl ether (TBME) and stirred
for at least 20 min to destroy boric acid esters. The layers were
separated and the aqueous layer was washed with another portion of
50 mL of TBME. The combined organic layers were washed twice with
100 mL of saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic layer
was dried over 11 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The
solvents were evaporated on a rotary evaporator at 45.degree. C.
(bath temperature) and <350 mbar yielding a colorless oil. The
oil was seeded with crystals and the resulting solid 55 was dried
under vacuum. Yield: 19.7g (86%). Assay by GC (HP-5 25 meter
column, 1 mL N.sub.2/min at 100.degree. C., FID detection at
300.degree. C., split 50:1).
EXAMPLE 11
Preparation of
(4R,5R)-1-((4-(4-(3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-2,3,4,5-tet-
rahydro-4-hydroxy-1,1-dioxido-1-benzithiepin-5-yl)phenoxy)methyl)phenyl)me-
thyl-4-aza-1-azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane Chloride, 41
[0367] 99
[0368] Step 1. Preparation of (4R,5R)-26. 100
[0369] A 1000 mL 4 neck jacketed Ace reactor flask was fitted with
a mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple, four
internal baffles and a 28 mm Teflon turbine agitator. The flask was
purged with nitrogen gas and charged with 25.0 grams of (4R,5R)-28
and 125 mL of N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC). To this was added 4.2
grams of 50% sodium hydroxide. The mixture was heated to 50.degree.
C. and stirred for 15 minutes. To the flask was added 8.3 grams of
55 dissolved in 10 mL of DMAC, all at once. The temperature was
held at 50.degree. C. for 24 hrs. To the flask was added 250 mL of
toluene followed by 125 mL of dilution water. The mixture was
stirred for 15 minutes and the layers were then allowed to separate
at 50.degree. C. The flask was then charged with 125 mL of
saturated sodium chloride solution and stirred 15 minutes. Layers
separated cleanly in 30 seconds at 50.degree. C. Approximately half
of the solvent was distilled off under vacuum at 50.degree. C. The
residual reaction mixture contained (4R,5R)-26.
[0370] Step 2. Preparation of (4R,5R)-27. 101
[0371] Toluene was charged back to the reaction mixture of Step 1
and the mixture was cooled to 35.degree. C. To the mixture was then
added 7.0 grams of thionyl chloride over 5 minutes. The reaction
was exothermic and reached 39.degree. C. The reaction turned cloudy
on first addition of thionyl chloride, partially cleared then
finally remained cloudy. The mixture was stirred for 0.5 hr and was
then washed with 0.25N NaOH. The mixture appeared to form a small
amount of solids that diminished on stirring, and the layers
cleanly separated. The solvent was distilled to a minimum stir
volume under vacuum at 50.degree. C. The residual reaction mixture
contained (4R,5R)-27.
[0372] Step 3. Preparation of 41.
[0373] To the reaction mixture of Step 2 was charged with 350 mL of
methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) followed by 10.5 mL water and 6.4 grams
of diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) dissolved in 10 mL of MEK. The
mixture was heated to reflux, and HPLC showed <0.5% of
(4R,5R)-27. The reaction remained homogenous initially then
crystallized at the completion of the reaction. An additional 5.3
mL of water was charged to the flask to redissolve product.
Approximately 160 mL of solvent was then distilled off at
atmospheric pressure. The mixture started to form crystals after 70
mL of solvent was distilled. Water separated out of distillate
indicating a ternary azeotrope between toluene, water and methyl
ethyl ketone (MEK). The mixture was then cooled to 25.degree. C.
The solids were filtered and washed with 150 mL MEK, and let dry
under vacuum at 60.degree. C. Isolated 29.8.0 g of off-white
crystalline 41.
Example 11a
Alternate Preparation of
(4R,5R)-1-((4-(4-(3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-2-
,3,4,5-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-1,1-dioxido-1-benzithiepin-5-yl)phenoxy)methyl-
)phenyl)methyl-4-aza-1-azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane Chloride, Form II
of 41
[0374] A 1000 mL 4 neck jacketed Ace reactor flask is fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple, four
internal baffles and a 28 mm Teflon turbine agitator. The flask is
purged with nitrogen gas and charged with 25.0 grams of (4R,5R)-28
and 100 mL of N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC). The mixture is heated
to 50.degree. C. and to it is added 4.02 grams of 50% sodium
hydroxide. The mixture is stirred for 30 minutes. To the flask is
added 8.7 grams of 55 dissolved in 12.5 mL of DMAC, all at once.
The charge vessel is washed with 12.5 mL DMAC and the wash is added
to the reactor. The reactor is stirred for 3 hours. To the reactor
is added 0.19 mL of 49.4% aq. NaOH and the mixture is stirred for 2
hours. To the mixture is added 0.9 g DABCO dissolved in 12.5 mL
DMAC. The mixture is stirred 30 to 60 minutes at 50.degree. C. To
the flask is added 225 mL of toluene followed by 125 mL of dilution
water. The mixture is stirred for 15 minutes and the layers are
then allowed to separate at 50.degree. C. The bottom aqueous layer
is removed but any rag layer is retained. The flask is then charged
with 175 mL of 5% hydrochloric acid solution and stirred 15
minutes. Layers are separated at 50.degree. C. to remove the bottom
aqueous layer, discarding any rag layer with the aqueous layer.
Approximately half of the solvent is distilled off under vacuum at
a maximum pot temperature of 80.degree. C. The residual reaction
mixture contains (4R,5R)-26.
[0375] Step 2. Preparation of (4R,5R)-27.
[0376] Toluene (225 mL) is charged back to the reaction mixture of
Step 1 and the mixture is cooled to 30.degree. C. To the mixture is
then added 6.7 grams of thionyl chloride over 30 to 45 minutes. The
temperature is maintained below 35.degree. C. The reaction turns
cloudy on first addition of thionyl chloride, then at about 30
minutes the layers go back together and form a clear mixture. The
mixture is stirred for 0.5 hr and is then charged with 156.6 mL of
4% NaOH wash over a 30 minute period. The addition of the wash is
stopped when the pH of the mixture reaches 8.0 to 10.0. The bottom
aqueous layer is removed at 30.degree. C. and any rag layer is
retained with the organic layer. To the mixture is charged 175 mL
of saturated NaCl wash with agitation. The layers are separated at
30.degree. C. and the bottom aqueous layer is removed, discarding
any rag layer with the aqueous layer. The solvent is distilled to a
minimum stir volume under vacuum at 80.degree. C. The residual
reaction mixture contains (4R,5R)-27.
[0377] Step 3. Preparation of 41.
[0378] To the reaction mixture of Step 2 is charged 325 mL of
methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) and 13 mL water. Next, the reactor is
charged 6.2 grams of diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) dissolved in
25 mL of MEK. The mixture is heated to reflux and held for 30
minutes. Approximately 10% of solvent volume is then distilled off.
The mixture starts to form crystals during distillation. The
mixture is then cooled to 20.degree. C. for 1 hour. The off-white
crystalline 41 (Form II) is filtered and washed with 50 mL MEK, and
let dry under vacuum at 100.degree. C.
Example 11b
Alternate Preparation of
(4R,5R)-1-((4-(4-(3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-2-
,3,4,5-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-1,1-dioxido-1-benzithiepin-5-yl)phenoxy)methyl-
)phenyl)methyl-4-aza-1-azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane Chloride, Form II
of 41
[0379] A 1000 mL 4 neck jacketed Ace reactor flask is fitted with a
mechanical stirrer, a nitrogen inlet, an addition funnel or
condenser or distilling head with receiver, a thermocouple, four
internal baffles and a Teflon turbine agitator. The flask is purged
with nitrogen gas and charged with 25.0 grams of (4R,5R)-28 and 125
mL of N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC). The mixture is heated to
50.degree. C. and to it is added 7.11 grams of 30% sodium hydroxide
over a period of 15 to 30 minutes with agitation. The mixture is
stirred for 30 minutes. To the flask is added 9.5 grams of solid
55. The reactor is stirred for 3 hours. To the mixture is added 1.2
g of solid DABCO. The mixture is stirred 30 to 60 minutes at
50.degree. C. To the flask is added 225 mL of toluene followed by
125 mL of water. The mixture is stirred for 15 minutes and the
layers are then allowed to separate at 50.degree. C. The bottom
aqueous layer is removed but any rag layer is retained with the
organic layer. The flask is then charged with 175 mL of 5%
hydrochloric acid solution and-stirred 15 minutes. Layers are
separated at 50.degree. C. to remove the bottom aqueous layer,
discarding any rag layer with the aqueous layer. The flask is then
charged with 225 mL of water and stirred 15 minutes. The layers are
allowed to separate at 50.degree. C. The bottom aqueous layer is
removed, discarding any rag layer with the aqueous layer.
Approximately half of the solvent is distilled off under vacuum at
a maximum pot temperature of 80.degree. C. The residual reaction
mixture contains (4R,5R)-26.
[0380] Step 2. Preparation of (4R,5R)-27.
[0381] Toluene (112.5 mL) is charged back to the reaction mixture
of Step 1 and the mixture is cooled to 25.degree. C. To the mixture
is then added 7.3 grams of thionyl chloride over 15 to 45 minutes.
The temperature of the mixture is maintained above 20.degree. C.
and below 40.degree. C. The reaction turns cloudy on first addition
of thionyl chloride, then at about 30 minutes the layers go back
together and form a clear mixture. The mixture is then charged with
179.5 mL of 4% NaOH wash over a 30 minute period. The mixture is
maintained above 20.degree. C. and below 40.degree. C. during this
time. The addition of the wash is stopped when the pH of the
mixture reaches 8.0 to 10.0. The mixture is then allowed to
separate at 40.degree. C. for at least one hour. The bottom aqueous
layer is removed and any rag layer is retained with the organic
layer. To the mixture is charged 200 mL of dilution water. The
mixture is stirred for 15 minutes and then allowed to separate at
40.degree. C. for at least one hour. The bottom aqueous layer is
removed, discarding any rag layer with the aqueous layer. The
solvent is distilled to a minimum stir volume under vacuum at
80.degree. C. The residual reaction mixture contains
(4R,5R)-27.
[0382] Step 3. Preparation of 41.
[0383] To the reaction mixture of Step 2 is charged 350 mL of
methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) and 7 mL water. The mixture is stirred
for 15 minutes and the temperature of the mixture is adjusted to
25.degree. C. Next, the reactor is charged with 6.7 grams of solid
diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO). The mixture is maintained at
25.degree. C. for three to four hours. It is then heated to
65.degree. C. and maintained at that temperature for 30 minutes.
The mixture is then cooled to 25.degree. C. for 1 hour. The
off-white crystalline 41 (Form II) is filtered and washed with 50
mL MEK, and let dry under vacuum at 100.degree. C.
EXAMPLE 12
Alternate Preparation of
(4R,5R)-1-((4-(4-(3,3-dibutyl-7-(dimethylamino)-2-
,3,4,5-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-1,1-dioxido-1-benzithiepin-5-yl)phenoxy)methyl-
)phenyl)methyl-4-aza-1-azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane Chloride, Form I
of 41
[0384] (4R,5R)-27 (2.82 kg dry basis, 4.7 mol) was dissolved in
MTBE (9.4 L). The solution of (4R,5R)-27 was passed through a 0.2
mm filter cartridge into the feeding vessel. The flask and was
rinsed with MTBE (2.times.2.5 L). The obtained solution as passed
through the cartridge filter and added to the solution of
(4R,5R)-27 in the feeding vessel. DABCO (diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane,
0.784 kg, 7.0 mol) was dissolved in MeOH (14.2 L). The DABCO
solution was passed through the filter cartridge into the 100 L
nitrogen-flushed reactor. The Pyrex bottle and the cartridge filter
were rinsed with MeOH (7.5 L) and the solution was added to the
reactor. The (4R,5R)-27 solution was added from the feeding vessel
into the reactor at 37.degree. C. over a period of 10 min, while
stirring. Methanol (6.5 L) was added to the Pyrex bottle and via
the cartridge filter added to the feeding vessel to rinse the
remaining (4R,5R)-27 into the reactor. The reaction mixture was
brought to 50-60.degree. C. over 10-20 min and stirred at that
temperature for about 1 h. The mixture was cooled to 20-25.degree.
C. over a period of 1 h. To the reaction mixture, methyl t-butyl
ether (MTBE) (42 L) was added over a period of 1 h and stirred for
a minimum of 1 h at 20-25.degree. C. The suspension was filtered
through a Buchner funnel. The reactor and the filter cake were
washed with MTBE (2.times.14 L). The solids were dried on a rotary
evaporator in a 20 L flask at 400-12 mbar, 40.degree. C., for 22 h.
A white crystalline solid was obtained. The yield of 41 (Form I)
was 3.08 kg (2.97 kg dry, 93.8%) and the purity 99.7 area % (HPLC;
Kromasil C4, 250.times.4.6 mm column; 0.05% TFA in H.sub.2O/0.05%
TFA in ACN gradient. UV detection at 215 nm).
Example 12a
Conversion of Form I of Compound 41 into Form II of Compound 41
[0385] To 10.0 grams of Form I of 41 in a 400 mL jacketed reactor
is added 140 mL of MEK. The reactor is stirred (358 rpm) for 10
minutes at 23.degree. C. for 10 minutes and the stirring rate is
then changed to 178 rpm. The suspension is heated to reflux over 1
hour using a programmed temperature ramp (0.95.degree. C./minute)
using batch temperature control (cascade mode). The delta T.sub.max
is set to 5.degree. C. The mixture is held at reflux for 1 hour.
The mixture is cooled to 25.degree. C. After 3 hours at 25.degree.
C., a sample of the mixture is collected by filtration. Filtration
is rapid (seconds) and the filtrate is clear and colorless. The
white solid is dried in a vacuum oven (80.degree. C., 25 in. Hg) to
give a white solid. The remainder of the suspension is stirred at
25.degree. C. for 18 hours. The mixture is filtered and the cake
starts to shrink as the mother liquor reaches the top of the cake.
The filtration is stopped and the reactor is rinsed with 14 mL of
MEK. The reactor stirrer speed is increased from 100 to 300 rpm to
rinse the reactor. The rinse is added to the filter and the solid
is dried with a rapid air flow for 5 minutes. The solid is dried in
a vacuum oven at 25 in. Hg for 84 hours to give Form II of 41.
EXAMPLE 13
Preparation of 2-(phenylthiomethyl)hexanal
[0386] 102
[0387] To a stirred mixture of n-butylacrolein (9.5 ml, 71.3 mmol)
and Et.sub.3N (0.5 mL, 3.6 mmol) at 0.degree. C. under nitrogen is
added thiophenol (7.3 mL, 71.3 mmol) in 5 minutes. The mixture is
allowed to warm to room temperature in 30 minutes. .sup.1H NMR of
the reaction mixture sample will show quantitative conversion.
Et.sub.3N is removed under reduced pressure.
EXAMPLE 14
Preparation of 2-((4-methoxyphenylthio)methyl)hexanal
[0388] 103
[0389] To a stirred mixture of n-butylacrolein (2.66 ml, 20 mmol)
and Et.sub.3N (0.14 mL, 1 mmol) at 0.degree. C. under nitrogen is
added 4-methoxythiophenol (2.46 mL, 20 mmol) in 5 minutes. The
mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature in 30 minutes.
.sup.1HNMR of the reaction mixture sample will show quantitative
conversion. Et.sub.3N is then removed under reduced pressure.
EXAMPLE 15
Preparation of 2-((4-chlorophenylthio)methyl)hexanal
[0390] 104
[0391] To a stirred mixture of n-butylacrolein (5.32 ml, 40 mmol)
and Et.sub.3N (0.28 mL, 2 mmol) at 0.degree. C. under nitrogen is
added 4-chlorothiophenol (5.78 g, 40 mmol) in 5 minutes. The
mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature in 30 minutes.
.sup.1HNMR of the reaction mixture sample will show quantitative
conversion. Et.sub.3N is then removed under reduced pressure.
EXAMPLE 16
Preparation of 2-(acetylthiomethyl)hexanal
[0392] 105
[0393] To a stirred mixture of n-butylacrolein (13.3 ml, 100 mmol)
and Et.sub.3N (0.7 mL, 5 mmol) at 0.degree. C. under nitrogen is
added thioacetic acid (7.2 mL, 100 mmol) in 5 minutes. The mixture
is allowed to warm to room temperature in 30 minutes. .sup.1HNMR of
the reaction mixture sample will show quantitative conversion.
Et.sub.3N is then removed under reduced pressure.
EXAMPLE 17
Preparation of 2-methyl-3-phenylthiopropanal
[0394] 106
[0395] To a stirred mixture of 51.4 g (0.733 mole) of methacrolein
and 2 g (0.018 mole) of triethylamine at 0-5.degree. C. is added
80.8 g (0.733 mole) of benzenethiol slowly. The addition rate is
such that the temperature was under 10.degree. C. The reaction
mixture is stirred at 0-5.degree. C. for one hour. The mixture is
placed on a rotary evaporator to remove triethylamine.
EXAMPLE 18
Preparation of 2-(((4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hexanal
[0396] 107
[0397] To a stirred solution of 4-chlorobenzosulfinate sodium salt
(4.10 g, 20.81 mmol) in 20 mL of acetic acid at 60.degree. C. is
added 2-butylacrolein (3.8 mL, 28.56 mmol) slowly. The reaction
mixture us kept at 50.degree. C. for 3.5 hours. The mixture us
diluted with 10 mL of water and extracted with ethyl acetate
(2.times.10 mL). The combined extract is washed with saturated
NaHCO.sub.3, water, brine, and dried with MgSO.sub.4. After
removing solvents, the product is obtained as a yellowish slightly
viscous oil in 94% yield.
EXAMPLE 19
Preparation of 2-(((4-methylphenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hexanal
[0398] 108
[0399] To a stirred solution of 4-toluenesulfinate sodium salt
(10.10 g, 56.68 mmol) in 35 mL of acetic acid at 50.degree. C. is
added 2-butylacrolein (10.6 mL, 79.66 mmol) slowly. The reaction
mixture is kept at 50.degree. C. for 3 hours. After cooling to room
temperature, the mixture is diluted with 50 mL of water and
extracted with ethyl acetate (2.times.25 mL). The combined extract
is washed with saturated NaHCO.sub.3, water, brine, and dried with
MgSO.sub.4. After removing solvents, the product is obtained as a
yellow liquid in 75% yield.
EXAMPLE 20
Preparation of (4E)-2-(acetylthiomethyl)-2-butylhex-4-enal
[0400] 109
[0401] To a stirred solution of 2-(acetylthiomethyl)hexanal (32.6
g, 0.173 mole) in 325 ml of xylenes in a 500-mL RBF fitted with a
Dean-Stark trap is added 2 hydroxy-3-butene (22.5 mL, 0.259 mole),
followed by pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (4.34 g, 0.017 mole) at
room temperature under nitrogen. The mixture is heated to reflux
overnight. After cooling to room temperature, the xylenes solution
is washed with 300 mL of saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution. The
aqueous phase is extracted with 300 mL of ethyl acetate. The
combined organic extract is washed with 200 mL of brine and 200 mL
of water. After removing solvents, the product is obtained by
vacuum distillation (157-160.degree. C./1.5 mmHg) in 80.5%
yield.
EXAMPLE 21
Preparation of (4E)-2-butyl-2-(phenylthiomethyl)hex-4-enal
[0402] 110
[0403] 2-(Phenylthiomethyl)hexanal (2.67 g, 12 mmol), 3-buten-2-ol
(5 mL, 58 mmol), and p-toluenesulfonic acid (0.05 g, 0.26 mmol) are
added to 25 ml of xylenes. The reaction mixture is heated to reflux
using a Dean-Stark trap to collect water. After 3 hours, the
mixture is cooled to room temperature and diluted with ethyl
acetate, which is washed saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution, brine, and
dried with MgSO.sub.4. After removing solvents, the crude product
is purified by chromatography. The product is obtained in 78.6% as
a colorless oil.
EXAMPLE 22
Preparation of (4E)-2-methyl-2-(phenylthiomethyl)-hept-4-enal
[0404] 111
[0405] 2-Methyl-3-phenylthiopropanal (9.07 g, 0.05 mole),
1-penten-3-ol (21.67 g, 0.25 mole), and p-toluenesulfonic acid
(0.24 g, 0.0013 mole) are added to 90 ml of xylenes. The reaction
mixture is heated to reflux using a Dean-Stark trap to collect
water. After 3 hours, the mixture is cooled to room temperature and
quenched with 30 ml of saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution. The two
phases are separated and the aqueous phase is extracted with 30 ml
of ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts is washed with 30
ml of brine and dried with Na.sub.2SO.sub.4. After removing
solvents, the crude product is purified by chromatography. The
product is obtained in 77% as a colorless oil.
EXAMPLE 23
Preparation of (4E)-2-methyl-2-(phenylthiomethyl)-hex-4-enal
[0406] 112
[0407] 2-Methyl-3-phenylthiopropanal (9.07 g, 0.05 mole),
3-buten-2-ol (18.04 g, 0.25 mole), and p-toluenesulfonic acid (0.24
g, 0.0013 mole) are added to 90 ml of xylenes. The reaction mixture
is heated to reflux using a Dean-Stark trap to collect water. After
3 hours, the mixture is cooled to room temperature and quenched
with 30 ml of saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution. The two phases are
separated and the aqueous phase is extracted with 30 ml of ethyl
acetate. The combined organic extracts is washed with 20 ml of
brine and dried with Na.sub.2SO.sub.4. After removing solvents, the
crude product is purified by chromatography. The product is
obtained in 74.3% as a colorless oil.
Example 24
[0408] Preparation of
(4E)-2-butyl-2-(((4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hex- -4-enal
113
[0409] To a stirred solution of
2-(((4-chlorophenyl)-sulfonyl)methyl)hexan- al (3.38 g, 11.73 mmol)
in 30 ml of toluene in a RBF fitted with a Dean-Stark trap is added
2-hydroxy-3-butene (5 mL, 57.73 mmol), followed by
p-toluenesulfonic acid (0.13 g) at room temperature under nitrogen.
The mixture is heated to reflux for 20 hours. After cooling to room
temperature, the toluene solution is diluted with 10 mL of ethyl
acetate and washed with 10 mL of saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution.
The aqueous phase is extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined
organic extract is washed with water (2.times.10 mL), brine
(1.times.10 mL), and dried with MgSO.sub.4. After removing
solvents, the product is obtained as a brownish oil in 98%
yield.
EXAMPLE 25
Preparation of
(4E)-2-butyl-2-(((4-methylphenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hex-4-enal
[0410] 114
[0411] To a stirred solution of
2-(((4-methylphenyl)-sulfonyl)methyl)hexan- al (5.63 g, 21 mmol) in
35 ml of toluene in a RBF fitted with a Dean-Stark trap is added 2
hydroxy-3-butene (10 mL, 115 mmol), followed by p-toluenesulfonic
acid (0.13 g) at room temperature under nitrogen. The mixture is
heated to reflux overnight. After cooling to room temperature, the
toluene solution is washed with saturated NaHCO.sub.3 solution
(2.times.10 mL), water (2.times.20 mL), brine (1.times.20 mL), and
dried with MgSO.sub.4. After removing solvents, the product is
obtained as a brownish oil in quantitative yield with a GC purity
of 89%.
EXAMPLE 26
Preparation of
2-butyl-2-(((4-methylphenyl)sulfonyl)methyl)hexanal
[0412] 115
[0413] To a solution of 0.5 g of
2-butyl-2-(((4-ethylphenyl)sulfonyl)methy- l)hexanal in 30 mL of
toluene is added 5 mL of 37% formaldehyde and 220 mg of 20%
Pd(OH).sub.2/C catalyst. The reaction mixture is purged with dry
nitrogen gas (3.times.) and hydrogen gas (3.times.) and
hydrogenated at 60 psi H2 and 60.degree. C. for 15 hours. The
catalyst is removed by filtration and washed with ethanol
(2.times.20 mL). Solvents of the combined washes and filtrate are
removed under vacuum to yield the crude product.
[0414] For the following examples .sup.1H and .sup.13C NMR spectra
were recorded on a Varian 300 spectrometer at 300 and 75 MHz
respectively. The .sup.1H chemical shifts are reported in ppm
downfield from tetramethylsilane. The .sup.13C chemical shifts are
reported in ppm relative to the center line of CDCl.sub.3 (77.0
ppm). Melting points were recorded on a Buchi 510 melting point
apparatus and are uncorrected. HPLC data was obtained on a Spectra
Physics 8800 Chromatograph using a Beckman Ultrasphere C18
250.times.4.6 mm column. HPLC conditions: detector wavelength=254
nm, sample size=10 .mu.L, flowrate=1.0 mL/min, mobile phase=(A)
0.1% aqueous trifluoroacetic acid: (B) acetonitrile. Quantitative
HPLC analysis was determined by running samples of known
concentration of the crude product and of purified product,
adjusting the peak areas for concentration differences, and
dividing the peak area of the crude sample by the peak area of the
purified sample. HPLC Gradient:
5 Time % A % B 0 min 50 50 5 min 50 50 30 min 0 100 40 min 0
100
EXAMPLE 27
Preparation of Compound 32
[0415] 116
[0416] Procedure A: Na.sub.2S.9H.sub.2O (8.64 g, 36.0 mmol) and
sulfur (1.16 g, 36.0 mmol) were combined in a 50 mL round-bottom
flask. The mixture was heated to 50.degree. C. until homogeneous,
and water (10.0 mL) was added. Compound 33 (10.00 g, 36.0 mmol) and
ethanol (100 mL) were combined in a 500 mL round-bottom flask. The
reaction flask was purged with N.sub.2 and equipped with mechanical
stirrer. The reaction mixture was heated to 65.degree. C. until
homogeneous, and then increased to 74.degree. C. The disulfide
solution was added to the 500 mL reaction flask over 10 minutes.
After 1.5 hrs at reflux, analysis of an aliquot by HPLC indicated
complete conversion of 33. Aqueous 18% NaOH (20.0 g, 90.0 mmol) was
added over 5 minutes (endothermic). After 15 minutes, the reaction
mixture was cooled to 0.degree. C., and 30% H.sub.2O.sub.2 (16.00
g, 140.0 mmol) was added dropwise keeping temp below 20.degree. C.
After 1.5 hrs at <20.degree. C., analysis of an aliquot by HPLC
indicated total oxidation of the sodium thiophenolate intermediate.
The ethanol was removed under reduced pressure at <65.degree. C.
Water (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was washed with
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 (100 mL). 10% HCl (.about.40 mL) was added until
pH=1, and the reaction mixture was extracted with CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2
(100.0 mL). 2-Butylacrolein (5.20 mL, 39.2 mmol) was added to the
organic extract, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour. Analysis
of an aliquot by HPLC indicated very little sulfinic acid
intermediate. The organic layer was concentrated in vacuo to give
an amber solid (14.19 g). Analysis by quantitative HPLC indicated
84% purity, which corresponds to 11.92 g Michael adduct (79% yield
of 32 based on 33).
[0417] Procedure B: Compound 33 (4.994 g, 17.98 mmol) and
dimethylacetamide (21.0 mL) were combined in a dry 250 mL
round-bottom flask. The reaction flask was purged with N.sub.2,
equipped with magnetic stirrer, and heated to 40.degree. C. until
the mixture became homogeneous. Na.sub.2S.3H.sub.2O (2.91 g, 22.37
mmol) and water (4.0 mL) were combined in a separate flask and
heated to 55.degree. C. until homogeneous. The Na.sub.2S solution
was then added portion-wise to the reaction flask over 25 minutes.
After 2.5 hrs at 40.degree. C., analysis of an aliquot by HPLC
indicated complete conversion of 33. After 2 hrs more, the reaction
mixture was cooled to 30.degree. C., and aq. 18% NaOH (10.02 g,
44.90 mmol) was added. After 20 min, the reaction mixture was
cooled to 0.degree. C., and 30% H.sub.2O.sub.2 (8.02 g, 70.6 mmol)
was added dropwise over 30 minutes while maintaining a temperature
of less than 15.degree. C. After 10 min, an aliquot was removed and
analyzed by HPLC, which indicated >93% oxidation of the sodium
thiophenolate intermediate. After 1 hr, Na.sub.2SO.sub.3 (6.05 g,
48.0 mmol) and water (50.0 mL) were added, and the cooling bath was
removed. After 20 min, the mixture was washed with toluene (or
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2) (2.times.50.0 mL). Toluene (or CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2)
(50.0 mL), 2-butylacrolein (2.60 mL, 19.6 mmol), and n-Bu.sub.4NI
(0.032 g, 0.087 mmol) were added, and the reaction mixture was
cooled to 0.degree. C. To this, 10% HCl (.about.30 mL) was added
until pH=1. The cooling bath was removed, and the reaction mixture
was stirred for 30 min. Analysis of an aliquot of the aqueous layer
by HPLC indicated very little sulfinic acid intermediate. After 30
min more, the aqueous layer was separated and discarded. The
organic layer was kept at -10.degree. C. overnight, stirred at R.T.
for 5 hrs. Analysis of the toluene solution by quantitative HPLC
indicated 6.444 g Michael adduct, (85% yield of 32 based on 3.
[0418] For characterization, a portion of the crude product was
concentrated in vacuo and precipitated from ethyl ether to afford a
yellow solid: mp 62.0-76.0.degree. C.; HPLC (CH.sub.3CN/H.sub.2O):
rt=22.4 min. .sup.1H NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ????????t, J=6.0 Hz, 3H),
1.24 (m, 4H), 1.53 (m, 1H), 1.70 (m, 1H), 2.83 (dd, J=14.1, 4.2 Hz,
1H), 2.98 (m, 1H), 3.56 (dd, J=14.4, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H),
4.53 (s, 2H), 6.87 (dd, J=6.6, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 7.13 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H),
8.12 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, J=1.2 Hz, 2H), 9.53 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H).
.sup.13C NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ? 13.6, 22.4, 28.1, 28.5, 37.4, 45.4,
53.9, 55.2, 114.4, 121.7, 127.3, 129.6, 130.3, 132.1, 142.7, 144.1,
150.7, 158.7, 199.5. HRMS (ES+) calcd for
C.sub.21H.sub.25NO.sub.6S+NH.sub.4: 437.1731, found: 437.1746.
Anal. (C.sub.21H.sub.25NO.sub.6S): C, 60.13; H, 6.01; N, 3.34; O,
22.88; S, 7.64. Found: C, 60.22; H, 5.98; N, 3.32; O, 22.77; S,
7.73.
EXAMPLE 28
Preparation of Compound 18a
[0419] 117
[0420] Procedure A: Compound 32 (11.577 g, 27.598 mmol),
p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.6115 g, 3.21 mmol),
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2 (70 ml) and 3-buten-2-ol (13.91 mL, 160.5 mmol)
were combined in a dry 250 mL round-bottom flask. The reaction
flask was purged with N.sub.2 and equipped with magnetic stirrer,
Dean Stark trap, and reflux condenser. The reaction mixture was
heated to reflux. After 10.25 hrs, analysis of an aliquot by HPLC
indicated 78.6% 18a, 13.3% pre-Claisen enol ether, 3.7% 32 and
approximately 4% byproducts. K.sub.2CO.sub.3 (1.50 g, 10.8 mmol)
was added to the reaction flask. After 2.5 hrs, CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2
(50.0 mL) was added, and the mixture was filtered through celite.
The filtrate was collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield an
amber oil (15.73 g). Quantitative HPLC was performed using a sample
of purified 18a. The total peak area of the crude product was
determined by summing the pre-Claisen enol ether and 18a peaks. It
was assumed that they have the same HPLC response factors. Analysis
by quantitative HPLC indicated 90% purity, which corresponds to
14.20 g 18a and pre-Claisen enol ether 47, (94% yield of 18a based
on 32).
[0421] Procedure B: Compound 32 (5.43 g, 12.9 mmol), 3-buten-2-ol
(76.16 g, 85.4 mmol), p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.258 g,
1.36 mmol) and toluene (51.0 mL) were combined in a 100 mL
round-bottom flask. The reaction flask was purged with N.sub.2 and
equipped with magnetic stirrer, Dean Stark trap, condenser, and
vacuum line. The condenser was cooled to -10.degree. C. via a
Cryocool bath, and the Dean Stark trap was filled with 3-buten-2-ol
(about 111 mL). The reaction flask was evacuated to 107.5 mmHg via
a pressure controller and heated to 49.degree. C. After 4 hrs, the
reaction flask was cooled to R.T. and concentrated in vacuo at
30.degree. C. The crude product was collected as an amber oil
(8.154 g). Quantitative HPLC was performed using a sample of
purified 18a. The total peak area of the crude product was
determined by summing the pre-Claisen enol ether and 18a peaks. It
was assumed that they have the same HPLC response factors. Analysis
by quantitative HPLC indicated 69% purity, which corresponds to
5.626g 18a and pre-Claisen enol ether 47, (80% yield of 18a based
on 32)):
[0422] HPLC (CH.sub.3CN/H.sub.2O): 18a: rt=32.56, 32.99, 33.09 min,
pre-Claisen enol ether: rt=30.7 min. .sup.1H NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ?
0.84-0.93 (m, 3H), 1.09-1.34 (m, 10H), 1.40-1.70 (m, 2H), 2.16-2.35
(m, 1H), 2.88-2.98 (m, 1H), 3.52-3.63 (m, 1H), 3.80 (m, 3H),
3.84-4.10 (m, 2H), 4.49 (s, 1H), 4.50 (s, 1H), 4.59 (d, J=3.0 Hz,
0.25H), 4.60 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 0.25H), 4.65 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 0.251H), 4.70
(d, J=2.4 Hz, 0.25H), 5.00-5.18 (m, 4H), 5.42-5.84 (m, 2H), 6.87
(d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.12-7.17 (m, 2H), 8.02
(t, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 8.14-8.17 (m, 1H), 8.23-8.27 (m, 1H); .sup.13C
NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ??13.8, 20.1, 20.9, 21.0, 21.4, 21.51, 21.57,
21.6, 22.53, 22.55, 22.57, 28.7, 28.8, 28.94, 28.99, 29.0, 29.3,
29.4, 29.8, 37.1, 37.2, 37.3, 38.73, 38.75, 53.3, 55.2, 55.60,
55.66, 55.7, 55.9, 73.4, 73.5, 73.8, 73.9, 74.3, 75.1,
75.9,97.7,98.3,98.4,99.5, 113.6, 114.4, 114.5, 114.9, 115.7, 115.9,
116.1, 116.3, 116.7, 116.9, 121.22, 121.26, 121.31, 121.34, 126.70,
126.75, 126.8, 129.73, 129.77, 130.45, 130.48, 130.5, 131.51,
131.51, 131.57, 139.6, 139.8, 139.9, 140.1, 140.2, 140.3, 143.6,
143.70, 143.71, 143.81, 143.84, 144.26, 144.29, 144.34, 144.35,
144.37, 150.5, 158.6; HRMS (ES+) calcd for
C.sub.29H.sub.39NO.sub.7S+NH.sub.4: 563.2791, found: 563.2804.
EXAMPLE 29
Preparation of Compound 31
[0423] 118
[0424] Procedure A: A crude mixture of 18a and pre-Claisen enol
ether 47 (13.636 g, 24.989 mmol), o-xylene (75.0 mL), and calcium
hydride (0.334 g, 7.93 mmol) were combined in a dry 250 mL
round-bottom flask. The reaction flask was purged with N.sub.2,
equipped with magnetic stirrer, and heated to 145.degree. C. After
3 hours, an aliquot was removed and analyzed by HPLC, which
indicated 93% 31, 1% 32, 3% pre-Claisen enol ether 47, and 4%
byproducts. The reaction mixture was cooled to RT and filtered
through celite washing with o-xylene (50.0 mL). The crude product
was concentrated in vacuo and collected as an amber oil (11.525g).
Analysis by quantitative HPLC indicated 86% purity, which
corresponds to 9.9115g Claisen product (80% yield based on the
mixture of 31 and pre-Claisen enol ether 47).
[0425] Procedure B: A crude mixture of 18a and pre-Claisen enol
ether 47 (2.700 g, 4.948 mmol), toluene (15.0 mL) and calcium
hydride (0.0704g, 1.67 mmol) were combined in a dry Fischer-Porter
bottle. The reaction flask was purged with N.sub.2, equipped with
magnetic stirrer, and heated to 145.degree. C. After 10 hours,
analysis of an aliquot by HPLC indicated 90.9% Claisen product 31),
2.8% pre-Claisen enol ether 47, 1.3% 18a and 5% byproducts. Toluene
(30.0 mL) was then added, and the mixture was filtered through
celite. Concentration in vacuo of the filtrate afforded the crude
product as an amber oil (2.6563 g). Analysis by quantitative HPLC
indicated 82% purity, which corresponds to 2.1782 g Claisen product
31, (93% yield based on the mixture of 18a and pre-Claisen enol
ether 47).
[0426] Procedure C: Purified 18a (0.228 g, 0.417 mmol) was placed
in a 100 mL round-bottom flask. The reaction flask was placed in a
Kugelrohr apparatus and evacuated to 100 mtorr. After 1 hr, the
apparatus was heated to 40.degree. C. After 15 minutes more, the
apparatus was heated to 145.degree. C. After 1 hr, the apparatus
was cooled to R.T. to afford an dark oil (0.171 g). Analysis by
HPLC indicated 88% Claisen product 31, 3% pre-Claisen enol ether 47
3% 18a and 6% byproducts. This corresponds to an 81% yield based on
18a. Quantitative HPLC was not performed.
[0427] For characterization, a portion of the residue was purified
by flash column chromatography on silica gel (eluting with
EtOAc/hexanes), concentrated in vacuo, and the desired product was
collected as an amber oil: HPLC(CH.sub.3CN/H.sub.2O): rt=29.1 min.
.sup.1H NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ??0.88 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 3H), 1.06 (m, 1H),
1.17-1.34 (m, 3H), 1.61 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 3H), 1.68 (m, 1H), 1.83-1.93
(m, 1H), 2.42 (dd, J=14.4, 6.6 Hz, 1H), 2.63 (dd, J=14.7, 8.1 Hz,
1H), 3.12 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 4.52 (ABq, 2H), 5.16-5.26 (m, 1H),
5.52-5.64 (m, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.11 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H),
8.09 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 9.40 (s, 1H)?? .sup.13C
NMR (CDCl.sub.3) ? 13.7, 17.9, 22.8, 25.6, 32.6, 35.9, 37.2,52.6,
55.1, 57.2, 114.4, 121.7, 123.4, 127.1, 129.8, 130.2, 131.2, 131.5,
143.7, 144.5, 150.5, 158.7, 202.5. HRMS (ES+) calcd for
C.sub.25H.sub.31NO.sub.6S+NH.sub.4: 491.2216, found: 491.2192.
Anal. (C.sub.25H.sub.31NO.sub.6S): C, 63.40; H, 6.60; N, 2.96; 0,
20.27; S, 6.77. Found: C, 63.36; H, 6.39; N, 3.05; 0, 20.59; S,
6.71.
Other Reactions to Form Claisen Product 31
[0428] General procedure for other reactions of acetal to: In a
typical reaction, the purified acetal 18a is combined with solvent,
base and water removing agent (if indicated) and heated. The
zeolites and molecular sieves are activated at 300.degree. C. The
reported conversion is based on the peak area of 31 vs. 18a in the
HPLC data. The reported yield is based on the peak area of the
products vs. byproducts in the HPLC data. The results are
summarized below.
6 Ex- amp- le No. Base/Conditions Results 30 100.degree. C. 95%
conv./32% yield @ 4 hrs. 31 4 A sieves/o-xylene/145.degree. C. 6%
conv./39% yield @ 5 hrs. 32 o-xylene/120.degree. C. 100% conv./58%
yield @ 2.5 33 o-xylene/145.degree. C. 100% conv./70% yield @ 2
hrs. 34 CH.sub.3CN/140.degree. C. 0% conv. @ 6 hrs. 35 PPTS(0.1
eq.)/pyr.(0.15 eq.)/o- 84% conv./74% yield @ 3 hrs.
xylene/120.degree. C. 36 PPTS(0.13 eq.)/4 A sieves/o- 21% conv./74%
yield @ 1 hrs. xylene/120.degree. C. 37 pyr.(9.0
eq.)/CH.sub.3CN/140.degree. C. 0% conv. @ 2.5 hrs. 38 pyr.(12.3
eq.)/xylenes/140.degree. C. 1% conv./100% yield @ 2 hrs. 39
Et.sub.3N(0.3 eq.)/o-xylene/145.degree. C. 19% conv./78% yield @ 6
hrs. 40 CaH.sub.2(0.46 eq.)/4 A sieves/o- 97% conv./92% yield @ 5
hrs. xylene/145.degree. C. 41 CaH.sub.2(0.3
eq.)/PhCH.sub.3/145.degree. C. 96% conv./95% yield @ 10 hrs. 42
CaH.sub.2(0.43 eq.)/PTSA(0.07 eq.)/ 100% conv./34% yield @ 1 hrs. 4
A sieves/o-xylene/145.degree. C. 43 CaH.sub.2(0.42 eq.)/4 A 0.2%
conv./11% yield @ 8 hrs. sieves/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/145.degree. C. 44
PhCH.sub.3/prefilter through basic 98% conv./79% yield @ 3.5 hrs.
alumina/145.degree. C. 45 AlCl.sub.3(2.0 eq.)/Et.sub.3N(4.1 0%
conv. @ 4 hrs. eq.)/THF/25.degree. C. 46 Pd(PhCN).sub.2Cl.sub.2
(0.1 eq.)/ reversion to 32. THF/25.degree. C. 47
BF.sub.3.OEt.sub.2(1.2 eq.)/ reversion to 32.
CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/-50.degree. C. 48 HMDS/TMSI/CH.sub.2Cl.su-
b.2/25.degree. C. 0% conv. @ 5 hrs.
Other Reactions to Form Acetal 18a and the Pre-Claisen Enol Ether
47
[0429] General procedure: In a typical reaction, the sulfone
aldehyde 32 is combined with 3-buten-2-ol (about 5 to about 50
eq.), solvent and acid source indicated. If indicated, 4 A
molecular sieves (50 wt %), and trimethyl orthoformate TMOF (1.2
eq.) are added to the reaction flask. If no solvent is indicated,
3-buten-2-ol is the solvent. The zeolites and molecular sieves are
activated at 300.degree. C. The observed products are a mixture of
the acetal 18a and the pre-Claisen enol ether, as determined by
LCMS and NMR. The reported conversion is based on the peak area of
product(s) vs. 32 in the HPLC data. The reported yield is based on
the peak area of the products vs. byproducts in the HPLC data. The
results are summarized below.
7 Example No. Acid/Conditions Results 49 TFA(0.24 eq.)/CH.sub.3CN/4
.ANG. 2.5% conv./50% yield @ 18 hrs. sieves/25.degree. C. 50
TFA(3.5 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/50.degree. C. 42% conv./74% yield @ 4.5
hrs. 51 TFA(3.8 eq.)/Isopropenyl acetate(3.3 44% conv./95% yield @
eq.)/50.degree. C. 2 hrs. 52 TFA(3.5 eq.)/65.degree. C. 68%
conv./86% yield @ 5.5 hrs. 53 TFA(3.0 eq.)/90.degree. C. 73%
conv./75% yield @ 5.5 hrs. 54 TFA(3.0 eq.)/PhCH.sub.3/4 .ANG. 90%
conv./53% yield @ 58 hrs. sieves/TMOF/120.degree. C. 55 TFA(3.0
eq.)/CH.sub.3CN/4 .ANG. 92% conv./58% yield @ 41 hrs.
sieves/TMOF/120.degree. C. 56 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/25.degree. C. 78%
conv./100% yield @ 16 hrs. 57 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/4 .ANG.
sieves/50.degree. C. 87% conv./99% yield @ 2 hrs. 58 PTSA(0.1
eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/70.degree. C. 95% conv./92% yield @ 5.75 hrs.
59 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/90.degree. C. 87% conv./74% yield @
2 hrs. 60 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/Isopropenyl acetate (3.3 63% conv./94%
yield @ 2.5 eq.)/50.degree. C. hrs. 61 PTSA(0.12 eq.)/Isopropenyl
acetate 83% conv./91% yield @ (3.2 eq./90.degree. C. 1 hrs. 62
PTSA(0.1 eq.)/PhCH.sub.3/4 .ANG. 29% conv./70% yield @ 18 hrs.
sieves/TMOF/90.degree. C. 63 PTSA(0.3 eq.)/PhCH.sub.3/4 .ANG. 37%
conv./70% yield @ 70 hrs. sieves/TMOF/120.degree. C. 64 PTSA(0.1
eq.)/PhCH.sub.3/49.degree. C. @ 95% conv./93% yield @ 3.5 hrs.
107.5 mmHg 65 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/o-xylene/4 .ANG. 92% conv./96% yield @
3.5 hrs. sieves/50.degree. C. 66 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/o-xylene/50.degree.
C. 59% conv./58% yield @ 7.5 hrs. 67 PTSA(0.1
eq.)/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/4 .ANG. 95% conv./100% yield @ 3.5 hrs.
sieves/47.degree. C. 68 PTSA(0.05 eq.)/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/4 .ANG. 95%
conv./99% yield @ sieves/47.degree. C. 5 hrs. 69 PTSA(0.025
eq.)/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/4 .ANG. 15% conv./91% yield @ 6.5 hrs.
sieves/47.degree. C. 70 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/47.degree.
C. 100% conv./96% yield @ 1 hrs. 71 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/EtOAc/90.degree.
C. 75% conv./85% yield @ 5 hrs. 72 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/EtOAc/4 .ANG.
sieves/50.degree. C. 44% conv./85% yield @ 1.5 hrs. 73 PTSA(0.1
eq.)/iPrOAc/4 .ANG. sieves/50.degree. C. 62% conv./93% yield @ 6
hrs. 74 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/BuOAc/4 .ANG. sieves/50.degree. C. 72%
conv./69% yield @ 6 hrs. 75 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/THF/4 .ANG. 63% conv./94%
yield @ sieves/50.degree. C. 7 hrs. 76 PTSA(0.24 eq.)/CH.sub.3CN/4
.ANG. sieves/25.degree. $$ 85% conv./100% yield @ 19 hrs. 77
PTSA(0.1 eq.)/MIBK/4 .ANG. sieves/50.degree. C. 59% conv./95% yield
@ 3 hrs. 78 PTSA(0.1 eq.)/PhCF.sub.3/50.degree. C. 55% conv./65%
yield @ 4 hrs. 79 PTSA(0.15 eq.)/Pd(PhCN).sub.2Cl.sub.2 100%
conv./97% yield @ (0.09 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/25.degree. C. 23 hrs.
80 PPTS(0.1 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/ 65% conv./87% yield @ 90.degree.
C. 7.5 hrs. 81 CBV 5020 zeolites(25 wt %)/CH.sub.3CN/25 30%
conv./97% yield @ 22 hrs. 82 CBV 5020 zeolites(25 wt %)/ 81%
conv./99% yield @ 4 .ANG. sieves/50.degree. C. 2 hrs. 83 CBV 5020
zeolites(25 wt %)/ 66% conv./94% yield @ 4 .ANG. sieves/70.degree.
C. 24 hrs. 84 CBV 5020 zeolites(25 wt %)/ 81% conv./98% yield @ 4
.ANG. sieves/90.degree. C. 1 hrs. 85 CBV 5020 zeolites(25 wt %)/
71% conv./93% yield @ 90.degree. C. 2 hrs 86 CBV 5020 zeolites(25
wt %)/Isopropeny 79% conv./91% yield @ acetate 1.5 hrs. (3.0
eq.)/90.degree. C. 87 CBV 5020 zeolites(10 wt %)/PhCH.sub.3/4 .ANG.
40% conv./53% yield @ sieves/TMOF/ 21 hrs. 120.degree. C. 88
300WN0030 g zeolites(10 wt %)/PhCH.sub.3$$ 22% conv./57% yield @
sieves/ 21 hrs. TMOF/120.degree. C. 89 Montmorillonite K10(10wt.
%)/PhCH.sub.3/$$ 70% conv./64% yield @ sieves/TMOF/120.degree. C.
57 hrs. 90 Montmorillonite K10(20wt %)/ 4% conv./99% yield @ 4
.ANG. sieves/25.degree. C. 18 hrs. 91 Montmorillonite K10(20wt
%)/CH.sub.3CN/$$ 4% conv./99% yield @ sieves/25.degree. C. 21 hrs.
92 Amberlyst 15(20wt. %)/ 49% conv./96% yield @ CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/4
.ANG. sieves/47.degree. C. 2 hrs. 93 Acetic acid(0.24 eq.)/ 0%
conv./0% yield @ CH.sub.3CN/4 .ANG. sieves/25.degree. C. 22 hrs. 94
Acetic acid(3.0 eq.)/90.degree. C. 15% conv./78% yield @ 2.5 hrs.
95 Acetic acid (3.0 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/90.degree. C. 79% conv./84%
yield @ 6.5 hrs. 96 HCl (0.20 eq.)/25.degree. C. 3% conv./6% yield
@ 1 hrs. 97 HCl (4.1 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/ 87% conv./98% yield @
25.degree. C. 2.5 hrs. 98 HCl (1.1 eq.)/dioxane/4 .ANG.
sieves/25.degree. C. 67% conv./100% yield @ 1 hrs. 99 HCl (1.1
eq.)/CH.sub.2Cl.sub.2/4 .ANG. sieves/47.degree. C. 69% conv./100%
yield @ 1 hrs. 100 AlClEt.sub.2/(0.16 eq.)/4 .ANG.
sieves/25.degree. C. 80% conv./59% yield @ 47 hrs. 101
Pd(PPh.sub.3).sub.4 (0.10 eq.)/4 .ANG. sieves/25.degree. C.
retro-Michael reaction only 102 Pd(PhCN).sub.2Cl.sub.2 (0.10 eq.)/
5% conv./47% yield @ THF/4 .ANG. sieves/25.degree. C. 4.5 hrs. 103
Pd(PhCN).sub.2Cl.sub.2 (0.12 eq.)/ 63% conv./100% yield @ 4 .ANG.
sieves/25.degree. C. 2 hrs.
EXAMPLE 104
Preparation of Compound 29
[0430] 119
[0431] To a solution of 0.434 g of compound 31 in 30 mL of hot
ethanol was added 5 mL of 37% formaldehyde and 220 mg of 20%
Pd(OH).sub.2/C catalyst. The reaction mixture was purged with
nitrogen gas (3.times.) and H.sub.2 (3.times.) and hydrogenated at
60 psi and 60.degree. C. for 15 hours. The catalyst was removed by
filtration and washed with ethanol (2.times.20 mL). Solvents of the
combined washes and filtrate were removed to yield 370 mg of crude
29 (85%). An analytical sample was obtained by recrystallization
from ethanol and water.
EXAMPLE 105
Preparation of Compound 12c
[0432] 120
[0433] A 1L 3-neck jacked flask is fitted with baffles, a bottom
valve, an overhead stirred, an addition funnel, and a Neslab
cooling bath. To the reactor is charged 35 grams of potassium
thioacetate. The reactor is flushed with nitrogen gas and to it is
charged 85 mL of dimethylformamide (DMF). Mixing is started at 180
rpm and the bath is cooled to 18.degree. C. The reactor is again
flushed with nitrogen gas and to it is added 73.9 grams of compound
53 over 20 minutes via a dropping funnel. The pot temperature is
maintained at 23.degree. C. during the addition. The mixture is
stirred for 1 hour at about 23.degree. C. to 27.degree. C. To the
mixture is then added 80 mL of water followed by 100 mL of ethyl
acetate. The mixture is stirred for 20 minutes. The layers are
allowed to separate and the aqueous layer is drained off. To the
pot is added another 50 mL of water and the mixture is stirred for
15 minutes. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is
drained off. Then to the pot is added 50 mL of brine and the
mixture is stirred for another 15 minutes. The layers are separated
and the aqueous layer is removed. The organic layer is concentrated
under reduced pressure (water aspirator pressure) at 47.degree. C.
to obtain 68.0 grams of orange oily compound 12c.
EXAMPLE 106
Preparation of Diethyl Acetal Compound 12d
[0434] 121
[0435] A 250 mL 3-neck round bottom flask is fitted with an
overhead stirrer, a Teflon coated temperature probe, and a
separatory funnel. To the flask is charged 78 g of compound 12c and
200 mL of ethanol. The reactor is flushed with nitrogen gas and to
it is charged 60 mL of triethylorthoformate. Then to the flask is
added 4 grams of p-toluenesulfonic acid. The mixture is stirred at
room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture is then concentrated
under reduced pressure and to the flask is added 100 mL of ethyl
acetate. Next is added 1.7 grams of sodium bicarbonate in 50 mL of
water. The mixture is stirred for 3 minutes. The layers are allowed
to separate and the aqueous layer is drained. The organic layer is
filtered through a pad of sodium sulfate and the organic layer is
concentrated under reduced pressure (water aspirator pressure) to
afford 96.42 grams of orange oily compound 12d.
EXAMPLE 107
Preparation of Diethyl Acetal Compound 67
[0436] 122
[0437] A 0.5 L 3-neck jacked flask is fitted with baffles, a bottom
valve, an overhead stirrer, an addition funnel, a nitrogen inlet, a
silicon oil bubbler, a Teflon-coated temperature probe, and a
PolyScience cooling/heating bath. To the flask is charged 48.85
grams of compound 33. The flask is flushed with nitrogen gas and to
it is charged 75 mL of DMSO. The mixture is again flushed with
nitrogen and agitation is begun. The jacket temperature is set at
40.degree. C. and to the flask is added 56.13 grams of compound
12d. Stirring is continued for 30 minutes and to the mixture is
slowly added 28 mL of 50% aqueous NaOH over 120 minutes via a
dropping funnel. The mixture is stirred for 3 hours while
maintaining the jacket temperature at 40.degree. C. The reaction is
allowed to cool to ambient temperature and the mixture is stirred
for 15 hours (overnight). The jacket temperature is then adjusted
to 5.degree. C. and to the mixture is slowly added 300 mL of water.
The reaction is exothermic. The biphasic mixture is transferred to
a separatory funnel and the mixture is extracted with 2.times.150
mL of ethyl acetate. The layers were allowed to separate for 30
minutes and the aqueous layer was drained off. The ethyl acetate
layers are combined. The combined ethyl acetate mixture is
extracted successively with 400 mL and 100 mL of water. If the
layers do not readily separate within 30 minutes, 50 mL of brine
may be added to the mixture to aid in separation of the layers. The
aqueous layer is drained off. The ethyl acetate layer is then
extracted with 100 mL of brine. The ethyl acetate layer is then
dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and the solids are filtered
off through a plug of activated charcoal/Supercel Hyflow. The
filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure and dried under
vacuum for 18 hours to obtain 91.98 grams of an orange-brown,
viscous oil (compound 67).
EXAMPLE 108
Conversion of Diethyl Acetal Compound 67 to
1-(2,2-Dibutyl-3-oxopropylsulf-
onyl)-2-((4-methoxyphenyl)methyl)benzene (29)
[0438] 123
[0439] Compound 67 (36 grams dissolved in 122 mL of ethyl acetate),
300 mL acetic acid, 27.3 g of 37 wt % formaldehyde, and 50 mL of
water are charged into a 500 mL 1-neck round bottom flask in a Parr
Shaker. To the mixture is added 7.4 grams of 5% Pd/C (dry basis,
Johnson Mathey). The reactor is purged three times with nitrogen
gas and then purged three times with hydrogen gas. The reactor is
pressurized to 60 psi and heated to 60.degree. C. The temperature
and pressure are held for 16 hours after which time the reactor is
allowed to cool to room temperature. The reaction mixture is
filtered through a pad of solka flock on a course fritted glass
filter. The cake is washed twice with 40 mL of acetic acid and
concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The solid is mixed
with 100 mL ethanol and heated to 80.degree. C. until all the solid
is dissolved. To this is added 20 mL of tap water to form a
homogeneous solution. The mixture is cooled to room temperature and
to it is added 3 mL of ethyl acetate. A white slurry forms. The
slurry is heated to 60.degree. C. until a homogeneous solution
forms. The mixture is cooled to room temperature and held for two
hours. During this time compound 29 crystallizes. The solids are
filtered through a coarse fritted glass filter. The cake is washed
twice with 40 mL of a 20% (V/V) ethanol in water solution. The cake
is dried at 40-50.degree. C. in a vacuum oven until no weight loss
is observed.
EXAMPLE 109
Preparation of 2-(Acetylthiomethyl)-2-butyl-4-hexenal Ethylene
Glycol Acetal, 74
[0440] 124
[0441] Step 1. Preparation of 2-(Acetylthiomethyl)hexanal, 72.
125
[0442] A 1 L 3-neck round bottom flask is fitted with a magnetic
stir bar, a nitrogen inlet, a thermometer probe connected to a
temperature monitor, a 50 mL addition funnel, and an ice-water
bath. Into the flask is charged 37.0 ML of thiolacetic acid and the
flask contents are cooled to 0-5.degree. C. in the ice-water bath.
To the flask is then charged 69.0 mL of butylacrolein via the
addition funnel over 2 minutes. The temperature increases to a
maximum of about 21.degree. C. The reaction is cooled then to about
10.degree. C. and the flask is charged with 0.72 mL of
triethylamine. The temperature increases to about 57.degree. C.
within about one minute. Stirring continues until the temperature
drops to about 15.degree. C. The resulting product mixture contains
compound 72.
[0443] Step 2. Preparation of
2-(Acetylthiomethyl)-2-butyl-4-hexenal, 73. 126
[0444] The apparatus of Step 1 of this example is further fitted
with a Dean-Stark trap and a cold water condenser. The reaction
flask, containing the product mixture of Step 1, is further charged
with 50.0 mL of 3-buten-2-ol, 1.987 g of p-toluenesulfonic acid
monohydrate, and 600 mL of toluene. The mixture is heated to about
105-110.degree. C. with stirring for about 24 hours. During this
time water, as well as some 3-buten-2-ol and toluene collect in the
Dean-Stark trap. The reaction is complete when no more water
distills over. If desired, an additional 0.5 equivalents of
3-buten-2-01 can be added to the flask to make up for loss from
distillation. The mixture is allowed to cool to ambient
temperature. The resulting aldehyde mixture contains compound
73.
[0445] Step 3. Preparation of
2-(Acetylthiomethyl)-2-butyl-4-hexenal Ethylene Glycol Acetal,
74.
[0446] The apparatus and resulting aldehyde mixture of Step 2 of
this example are further charged with 31.0 mL of ethylene glycol.
The mixture is heated with stirring to 105-110.degree. C. for 2
hours. Water and toluene collect in the Dean-Stark trap during this
time. The reaction is complete when no more water distills over.
The mixture is cooled to ambient temperature and the reaction
mixture is washed successively with 100 mL of saturated sodium
bicarbonate aqueous solution, 100 mL of water, and 100 mL of brine.
The solvent is removed by evaporation in a rotary evaporator. The
yield is 149 grams of compound 74.
EXAMPLE 110
Preparation of Compound 67
[0447] 127
[0448] Step 1. Preparation of
2-(Acetylthiomethyl)-2-butyl-4-hexenal Diethyl Acetal, 75. 128
[0449] A 250 mL 3-neck round bottom flask is fitted with an
overhead stirrer, a Teflon coated temperature probe, and a
separatory funnel. To the flask is charged 78 g of compound 74 and
200 mL of ethanol. The reactor is flushed with nitrogen gas and to
it is charged 60 mL of triethylorthoformate. Then to the flask is
added 4 grams of p-toluenesulfonic acid. The mixture is stirred at
room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture is then concentrated
under reduced pressure and to the flask is added 100 mL of ethyl
acetate. Next is added 1.7 grams of sodium bicarbonate in 50 mL of
water. The mixture is stirred for 3 minutes. The layers are allowed
to separate and the aqueous layer is drained. The organic layer is
filtered through a pad of sodium sulfate and the organic layer is
concentrated under reduced pressure (water aspirator pressure) to
afford compound 75.
[0450] Step 2. Preparation of 2-butyl-2-(thiomethyl)hexanal Diethyl
Acetal, 76. 129
[0451] A 500 mL 3-neck round bottom flask is fitted with a
condenser, a magnetic stir bar, a nitrogen inlet, a thermocouple
connected to a temperature controller, and a heating mantle. The
flask is purged with nitrogen gas and charged with 19.2 grams of
compound 75, 96 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP), 28.3 grams (2.5
equiv.) of p-toluenesulfonyl hydrazide, and 18 mL (3.0 equiv.) of
piperidine. While stirring, the mixture is warmed to about
100.degree. C. for 2 hours. The temperature is kept below
107.degree. C. by removing the heat, if necessary. The mixture is
cooled to ambient temperature. The product mixture contains
compound 76. If desired, this reaction can be run using 2.5 equiv.
of p-toluenesulfonyl hydrazide and 2.5 equiv. of piperidine.
[0452] Step 3. Preparation of Compound 67.
[0453] The equipment and product mixture of Step 2 of this example
are used in this step. To the flask containing the product mixture
of Step 2 is charged 13.46 grams of compound 33 and 11.2 mL of 50%
(w/w) aqueous NaOH. The mixture is heated to 100.degree. C. with
mixing and held at that temperature for 2.5 hours. The mixture is
cooled to ambient temperature and to the flask is added 100 mL of
ethyl acetate. This mixture is washed with 100 mL of water. The
aqueous layer is separated and washed with 100 mL of ethyl acetate.
The ethyl acetate layers are combined and washed in succession with
3.times.100 mL of water and with 2.times.50 mL of brine. The
organic layer is dried over magnesium sulfate and the solvent is
removed under vacuum in a rotary evaporator. The yield is 26 grams
of compound 67 as a reddish brown oil.
EXAMPLE 111
Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC)
[0454] DSC experiments are performed either on a Perkin Elmer Pyris
7 Differential Scanning Calorimeter or on a TA Instruments
Differential Scanning Calorimeter with 5-10 mg samples hermetically
sealed in a standard aluminum pan (40 microliters) with a single
hole punched in the lid. An empty pan of the same type is used as a
reference. The heating rate is 10.degree. C./min with dry nitrogen
purge. FIG. 9 shows typical DSC thermograms for Form I (plot(a))
and Form II (plot(b)) of compound 41.
EXAMPLE 112.
X-Ray Powder Diffraction Patterns
[0455] X-ray powder diffraction experiments are conducted on an
Inel theta/theta diffraction system equipped with a 2 kW normal
focus X-ray tube (copper). X-ray scatter data are collected from 0
to 80.degree. 2 theta. Samples are run in bulk configuration. Data
are collected and analyzed on a Dell computer running Inel's
software. In at least one case, samples are placed in a glass
capillary tube and ends are sealed to prevent loss of solvent. The
capillary is mounted on a special adapter in the path of the X-ray
beam and data were collected.
[0456] Alternatively, the X-ray diffraction experiments are
conducted on a system comprising a Siemens D5000 diffraction system
equipped with a 2 kW normal focus X-ray tube (copper). The system
is equipped with an autosampler system with a theta-theta sample
orientation. Data collection and analysis is performed on a
MS-Windows computer with Siemens' proprietary software.
[0457] FIG. 6 shows typical X-ray powder diffraction patterns for
Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot(b)) of compound 41. Table 1
shows a summary comparison of prominent X-ray powder diffraction
peaks for Form I and Form II.
8 TABLE 1 Form I Form II 2-Theta Relative Peak 2-Theta Relative
Peak Value Intensity (%) Value Intensity (%) 7.203 15.0665 9.1962
18.6166 8.45 29.0688 12.277 29.2318 9.726 37.1457 12.584 8.39048
11.205 49.0207 12.833 7.67902 11.786 10.8439 13.872 100 12.51
15.9267 14.286 77.5682 13.342 11.0306 15.168 7.54978 14.25 16.3005
15.641 16.0194 14.859 16.1351 15.935 11.4935 15.526 43.0987 16.138
16.6656 15.874 25.424 16.399 36.1255 16.309 14.278 16.544 77.6935
17.121 14.1898 17.094 13.1102 17.498 13.173 17.645 38.4531 18.542
99.3626 18.511 33.0226 19.354 85.1982 18.826 91.0787 19.789 16.7251
19.128 25.2644 20.34 39.3083 19.327 18.8639 20.891 27.5965 19.906
38.7122 21.297 16.2266 20.085 12.7865 22.022 26.6845 20.23 10.2004
23.304 42.0171 21.00 8.58433 25.125 17.2159 21.48 47.6981 25.734
18.2944 21.729 33.6048 27.503 25.8376 22.089 12.1403 32.056 12.7407
22.4 10.0712 35.188 22.4211 22.748 13.3041 40.166 16.7913 22.959
14.5971 23.22 13.498 23.472 17.8224 23.965 16.9247 24.553 16.8594
25.038 9.6835 25.299 13.0904 25.626 13.9503 25.767 14.9202 25.887
11.2996 26.343 18.1531 26.873 9.87736 27.941 15.1787 28.228 15.4437
28.815 11.2996 29.475 13.7532 34.758 21.773 40.176 21.0731
Example 113
Fourier Transform Infrared Spectra
[0458] The Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) spectra for Form I and
Form II of compound 41 are obtained using a Bio-Rad FTS-45
Fourier-transform infrared spectrometer equipped with a micro-ATR
(attenuated total reflectance) beam condensing accessory (IBM
Corporation) mounted in the sample compartment of the instrument.
The sample compartment and optical bench of the spectrometer is
under a nitrogen purge. The software used for operating the
instrument and collecting the spectrum is Bio-Rad's Windows
98-based Win-IR software. The spectra are obtained using an
8-wavenumber resolution and 16 scans.
[0459] A small amount of sample is placed onto one side of a
5.times.10.times.1 mm KRS5 (a type of infrared transmitting
material commonly used in the IR world) ATR crystal, and lightly
tamped with a stainless steel micro spatula in order to ensure good
contact of the sample with the face of the crystal. The crystal is
mounted into the ATR beam-condensing accessory, and the sample
compartment allowed to purge for a few minutes to remove water
vapor and carbon dioxide (their presence reduces the quality of the
spectrum). This can be monitored on the screen of the operating
console, and when down to an acceptable level, the 16 scans are
collected to produce an interferogram. Prior to analyzing the
sample, a clean KRS5 crystal is mounted in the ATR accessory and a
background interferogram collected. The purge time and number of
scans for collecting the background should be the same as will be
used for analyzing the sample.
[0460] The Fourier-transform of the resulting interferogram is
automatically done and the spectrum appears on the screen. The
resulting spectrum is then smoothed and baseline corrected, if
necessary, then ATR corrected to obtain a spectrum that is
comparable to an absorption or transmission spectrum.
[0461] FIG. 7 shows typical FTIR spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and
Form II (plot (b)) of compound 41. Table 2 shows a summary
comparison of prominent FTIR peaks for Form I and Form II.
9 TABLE 2 Form I Peaks Form II Peaks (cm.sup.-1) (cm.sup.-1) 3163
3250 2870 2885 1596 1600 1300 1288 1239 1225 1182 1172 1055 1050
986 990 855 858 825 837 627 620
Example 114
Solid-State Carbon-13 NMR Analysis
[0462] Solid-state NMR. Cross-polarization magic-angle spinning
(CPMAS) .sup.13C NMR spectra were collected on a Monsanto-built
spectrometer operating at a proton resonance frequency of 127.0
MHz. Samples were spun at the magic angle with respect to the
magnetic field in a double-bearing rotor system at a rate of 3 kHz.
CPMAS .sup.13C NMR spectra were obtained at 31.9 MHz following 2-ms
matched, 50-kHz .sup.1H-.sup.13C cross-polarization contacts.
High-power proton dipolar decoupling (H.sub.1(H)=65-75 kHz) was
used during data acquisition. Residual spinning sidebands were
suppressed using the Total Suppression of Sidebands (TOSS) method.
In each experiment, approximately 219 mg of Form I and
approximately 142 mg Form II are used.
[0463] FIG. 8 shows typical solid-state .sup.13C nuclear magnetic
resonance (NMR) spectra for Form I (plot (a)) and Form II (plot
(b)) of compound 41. Table 3 shows a summary comparison of
prominent solid-state .sup.13C NMR peaks for Form I and Form
II.
10 TABLE 3 Form I (ppm) Form II (ppm) 158.55 157.971 151.712
142.325 145.986 137.172 140.852 134.043 136.628 127.232 133.489
125.390 128.151 118.212 120.052 113.057 115.266 106.615 113.241
76.795 109.928 68.512 76.795 57.100 68.860 47.712 54.523 43.661
46.239 37.951 43.847 21.942 40.901 14.763 24.519 13.281 14.395
3.351
EXAMPLE 115
Water Uptake Experiments
[0464] Water sorption experiments are performed on a Dynamic Vapor
Sorption (DVS) apparatus (DVS-1000 manufactured by Surface
Measurements Systems, Inc.). Experiments are performed at
25.degree. C. by initially drying the material of interest (about
10 mg sample) from 30% relative humidity (RH) (ambient room
condition) to about 9% RH in a stepwise fashion (10% RH step) by
purging with dry nitrogen until no further weight change was
observed. The samples are then exposed to a stepwise (10% RH steps)
increase in RH from about 0 to about 90% RH. Each successive step
is initiated when the change in weight over time at the relative
humidity was less than 0.0003% ((dm/dt)/m.sub.0.times.100, where m
is mass in mg, m.sub.0 is initial mass, and t is time in minutes).
The sample is then taken through the reverse of the stepwise % RH
increase. The data are collected on a computer and analyzed using
SMS' proprietary MS-Excel macro interface software. FIG. 10 shows
typical water sorption isotherm results for Form I (plot (a)) and
Form II (plot (b)) of compound 41. Table 4 shows a summary
comparison of water sorption and desorption isotherms for Form I
and Form II at 25.degree. C.
11TABLE 4 Desorption Sorption % % Weight % RH at 25.degree. C.
Weight Change Change Form I 0.45 0.057 0.057 9.2 0.9575 0.997 20.05
2.016 2.1025 29.75 3.4105 3.599 39.4 4.282 4.743 49.55 4.928 5.321
59.4 5.356 5.726 69.05 5.706 6.054 78.8 6.109 6.357 88.5 6.734
6.734 Form II 1.3 -0.02695 -0.02695 9.35 0.04715 0.04235 20.25
0.10585 0.09715 29.75 0.13755 0.14435 39.55 0.1809 0.1866 49.7
0.2386 0.2636 59.5 0.304 0.331 69.1 0.3945 0.3983 78.65 0.4695
0.4849 88.5 0.6446 0.6446
[0465] The examples herein can be performed by substituting the
generically or specifically described reactants and/or operating
conditions of this invention for those used in the preceding
examples.
[0466] The invention being thus described, it is apparent that the
same can be varied in many ways. Such variations are not to be
regarded as a departure from the spirit and scope of the present
invention, and all such modifications and equivalents as would be
obvious to one skilled in the art are intended to be included
within the scope of the following claims.
* * * * *